Rosemount Tank Radar 05402 Two-Wire Radar Level Transmitter User Manual Book 5400 RevHA
Rosemount Tank Radar AB Two-Wire Radar Level Transmitter Book 5400 RevHA
User Manual
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
November 2014
Rosemount 5400 Series
Superior Performance Two-Wire Non-Contacting
Radar Level Transmitter
iii
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA November 2014
Rosemount 5400 Series
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for
optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before
installing, using, or maintaining this product.
Within the United States, Emerson Process Management has two toll-free assistance
numbers.
Customer Central:
Technical support, quoting, and order-related questions.
United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST)
Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211
Europe / Middle East / Africa - 49 (8153) 9390
North American Response Center:
Equipment service needs.
1-800-654-7768 (24 hours a day — includes Canada)
For equipment service or support needs outside the United States, contact your local
Emerson Process Management representative.
There are no health hazards from the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter. The microwave
power density in the tank is only a small fraction of the allowed power density according to
international standards.
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified
applications.
Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified
hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Emerson
Process Management Sales Representative.
This product is designed to meet FCC and R&TTE requirements.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
iv
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
November 2014
v
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Contents
November 2014
Contents
1Section 1: Introduction
1.1 Manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.2 Service support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1.3 Product recycling/ disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1.4 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
2Section 2: Transmitter Overview
2.1 Theory of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
2.2 Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2.3 System architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
2.4 Process characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
2.5 Components of the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
2.6 Antenna selection guide/measuring range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
3Section 3: Mechanical Installation
3.1 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
3.2 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
3.3 Mounting considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
3.3.1 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
3.3.2 Special considerations in solids applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
3.3.3 Mounting in pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
3.3.4 Installation considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
3.3.5 Nozzle considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
3.3.6 Nozzle recommendations and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
3.3.7 Service space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
3.3.8 Beamwidth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
3.3.9 Vessel characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3.3.10Disturbing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3.3.11Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3.4 Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
3.4.1 Cone antenna flange connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
3.4.2 Process seal antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
3.4.3 Rod antenna threaded connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
3.4.4 Rod antenna flanged connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.4.5 Tri-Clamp™ tank connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Contents
vi
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Contents
November 2014
Contents
3.4.6 Bracket mounting on wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
3.4.7 Bracket mounting on pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
4Section 4: Electrical Installation
4.1 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
4.2 Wiring and power supply requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
4.3 Cable/conduit entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
4.3.1 Conduit electrical connector wiring (using minifast®). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
4.4 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
4.5 Cable selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
4.6 Hazardous areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
4.7 External circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
4.7.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
4.8 HART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
4.8.1 Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
4.8.2 Load limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
4.8.3 Non-intrinsically safe power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
4.8.4 Intrinsically safe power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
4.8.5 Type N approvals: non-sparking / energy-limited power supply . . . . . . . .53
4.8.6 Transient protection terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
4.9 FOUNDATION fieldbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
4.9.1 Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
4.9.2 Non-intrinsically safe power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
4.9.3 Intrinsically safe power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
4.9.4 Type N approvals: non-sparking / energy-limited power supply . . . . . . . .59
4.10HART to Modbus Converter (HMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4.10.1Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4.10.2Connection terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
4.10.3RS-485 bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
4.10.4Installation cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
4.10.5External HART devices (slaves). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
4.11Establish HART communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
4.11.1Connect to the MA/MB terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
4.11.2Connect to the HART terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
4.12Optional devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
4.12.1Tri-Loop™ HART to analog converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
4.12.2751 Field Signal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
4.12.3Smart Wireless THUM™ Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
vii
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Contents
November 2014
Contents
5Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.1 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
5.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
5.2.1 Basic configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
5.2.2 Configuration tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
5.3 Basic configuration parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5.3.1 Measurement units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5.3.2 Tank geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5.3.3 Process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
5.3.4 Volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
5.3.5 Analog output (HART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
5.3.6 Level and distance calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
5.3.7 Echo tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
5.3.8 ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
5.4 Basic configuration using RRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
5.4.1 System requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
5.4.2 Help in RRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
5.4.3 Installing the RRM software for HART communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
5.4.4 Specifying the COM port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.4.5 To set the COM port buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
5.4.6 Specifying measurement units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
5.4.7 Installing the RRM software for FOUNDATION fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
5.4.8 Specifying measurement units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.4.9 Using the Setup functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
5.4.10Guided setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
5.4.11Using the Setup functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.5 Configuration using a Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.7 Basic configuration using AMS Suite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.8 Configuration using DeltaV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.8.1 Advanced configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.9 FOUNDATION fieldbus overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.9.1 Assigning device tag and node address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.9.2 Foundation fieldbus block operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.10Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.10.1Radar level transmitter - level value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.10.2Radar level transmitter - level value in percent (%). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.11Tri-Loop™ HART to Analog Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.12HART multidrop configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
viii
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Contents
November 2014
Contents
6Section 6: Operation
6.1 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.2 Viewing measurement data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.2.1 Using the display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.2.2 Specifying display panel variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.2.3 Viewing measurement data in RRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.2.4 Viewing measurement data in AMS Suite and DeltaV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.3 LCD display error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.4 LED error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
7.1 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7.2 Troubleshooting overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.3 Service overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.3.1 Analyzing the measurement signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.3.2 Surface pulse not found. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.3.3 Registration of false echoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7.3.4 Using the Echo Curve Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.3.5 Using the Echo Curve Analyzer with a Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.4 Analog Output calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.5 Logging measurement data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.6 Backing up the transmitter configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.7 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.8 Configuration report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.9 Viewing input and holding registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.10Reset to factory settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.11Surface search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.12Using the Simulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.13Write protecting a transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.14Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.14.1Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.14.2Device status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.14.3Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
7.14.4Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.14.5Measurement status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.14.6Volume calculation status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.14.7Analog Output status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
7.14.8Application errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ix
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Contents
November 2014
Contents
7.15Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.15.1Resource block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7.15.2Transducer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7.15.3Analog Input (AI) function block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
8.1 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.2.1 Applicable models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.2.2 Skill level of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.3 Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.4 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.5.1 Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.5.2 Alarm and saturation levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.5.3 Amplitude threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.5.4 Write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.5.5 Site acceptance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.6 Operation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.6.2 Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.7 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.7.1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.7.2 Failure rate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.7.3 Useful lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.8 Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.9 Terms and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
AAppendix A: Reference Data
A.1 Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
A.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
A.1.2 4-20 mA HART® (output option code H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
A.1.3 Foundation™ fieldbus (output option code F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
A.1.4 RS-485 with Modbus communication
(output option code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
A.1.5 Display and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
A.1.6 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
A.1.7 Temperature and pressure limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
x
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Contents
November 2014
Contents
A.2 Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
A.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
A.2.2 Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
A.2.3 Beam angle and beam width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
A.2.4 Transition zone and near zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
A.2.5 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
A.3 Physical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
A.3.1 Material selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
A.3.2 Housing and closure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
A.3.3 Engineered solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
A.3.4 Tank connection and antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
A.4 Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
A.4.1 Rosemount 5402 and 5401 with SST Cone Antenna
(Model Code: 2S-8S). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
A.4.2 Rosemount 5402 and 5401 with Protective Plate Cone Antenna
(Model Code: 2H-8H, 2M-8M, and 2N-8N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
A.4.3 Rosemount 5401 with Rod Antenna (Model Code: 1R-4R). . . . . . . . . . . 202
A.4.4 Rosemount 5402 with Process Seal Antenna
(Model Code: 2P-4P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
A.4.5 Bracket mounting (Model Code: BR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
A.4.6 Process connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
A.5 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
BAppendix B: Product Certifications
B.1 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
B.2 European Directive information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
B.3 FCC and ICC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
B.4 Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
B.5 Hazardous locations certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
B.5.1 North-American certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
B.5.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
B.5.3 European certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
B.5.4 IECEx Approval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
B.5.5 EAC certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
B.5.6 Brazilian certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
B.5.7 Chinese certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
B.5.8 Japanese certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
B.5.9 Other certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
B.5.10Canadian Registration Number (CRN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
xi
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Contents
November 2014
Contents
B.6 Approval drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
CAppendix C: Advanced Configuration
C.1 Tank geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
C.1.1 Distance offset (G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
C.1.2 Minimum level offset (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
C.1.3 Hold off distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
C.1.4 Calibration distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
C.2 Advanced analog output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
C.3 Advanced transmitter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
C.3.1 Antenna type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
C.3.2 Empty tank handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
C.3.3 Full tank handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
C.3.4 Double bounce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
C.3.5 Surface echo tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
C.3.6 Filter settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
C.4 Advanced functions in RRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
C.4.1 Empty tank handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
C.4.2 Full tank handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
C.4.3 Double bounce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
C.4.4 Surface echo tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
C.4.5 Hold off setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
DAppendix D: Performing Proof Test
D.1 Performing proof test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
D.2 Field communicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
D.3 RRM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
D.4 AMS Suite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
EAppendix E: Level Transducer Block
E.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
E.1.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
E.1.2 Channel definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
E.2 Parameters and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
E.3 Supported units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
E.3.1 Unit codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
E.4 Diagnostics device errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
xii
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Contents
November 2014
Contents
FAppendix F: Register Transducer Block
F.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
F.1.1 Register access transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
GAppendix G: Advanced Configuration Transducer Block
G.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
G.1.1 Advanced configuration transducer block parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
HAppendix H: Resource Block
H.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
H.2 Parameters and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
H.2.1 PlantWeb® alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
H.2.2 Alarm priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
H.2.3 Recommended actions for PlantWeb alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
IAppendix I: Analog-Input Block
I.1 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
I.2 Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
I.3 Signal conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
I.4 Block errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
I.5 Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
I.6 Alarm detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
I.6.1 Status handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
I.7 Configure the AI block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
1
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 1: Introduction
November 2014
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
Manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Service support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Product recycling/ disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
1.1 Manual overview
The sections in this manual provide installation, configuration, and maintenance information for
the Rosemount 5400 Series Radar Level Transmitter. The sections are organized as follows:
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
Theory of operation
Description of the transmitter
Process and vessel characteristics
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
Installation procedure
Mounting considerations
Mounting
Section 4: Electrical Installation
Cable/conduit entries
Grounding
Cable selection
Hazardous areas
External circuit breaker
Power requirements
Connecting the transmitter
Non-intrinsically safe power supply
Intrinsically safe power supply
Optional devices
2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 1: Introduction
November 2014
Introduction
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
Configuration instructions
Configuration using the Rosemount Radar Master (RRM) software
Configuration using a Field Communicator
Configuration using AMS® Suite
Configuration using DeltaV™
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus overview
Section 6: Operation
Viewing measurement data with a display panel
Viewing measurement data in RRM
Viewing measurement data in AMS Suite and DeltaV
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Error and warning codes
Communication errors
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
Functional specifications
Installation
Configuration
Operation and maintenance
Spare parts
Appendix A: Reference Data
Specifications
Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties
Process connections
Ordering information
Appendix B: Product Certifications
Examples of labels
European ATEX Directive information
FM approvals
CSA approvals
IECEx approvals
TIIS approval
NEPSI approvals
INMETRO approvals
Approval drawings
3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 1: Introduction
November 2014
Introduction
Appendix C: Advanced Configuration
Advanced tank geometry
Advanced transmitter settings
Advanced functions in RRM
Appendix D: Performing Proof Test
Describes the process of performing proof test
Appendix E: Level Transducer Block
Describes the operation and parameters of the Level Transducer Block
Appendix F: Register Transducer Block
Describes the operation and parameters of the Register Transducer Block
Appendix G: Advanced Configuration Transducer Block
Describes the operation and parameters of the Advanced Configurations Transducer
Block
Appendix H: Resource Block
Describes the operation and parameters of the Resource Block
Appendix I: Analog-Input Block
Describes the operation and parameters of the Analog-Input function block
1.2 Service support
To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson
Process Management representative.
Within the United States, call the Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valves
Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24
hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials.
The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the
product was last exposed.
Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they
are informed of and understand the hazard. If the product being returned was exposed to a
hazardous substance as defined by Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA),
a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous substance
identified must be included with the returned goods.
4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 1: Introduction
November 2014
Introduction
Emerson Process Management Instrument and Valves Response Center representatives will
explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to
hazardous substances.
1.3 Product recycling/ disposal
Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in
accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.
1.4 Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this manual may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the safety messages listed at the beginning of each
section before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
5
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 1: Introduction
November 2014
Introduction
Failure to follow safe installation and service guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure the transmitter is installed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
applicable code of practice.
Use the equipment only as specified in this manual. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Do not perform any services other than those contained in this manual unless you are
qualified.
Any substitution of non-authorized parts or repair, other than exchanging the
complete transmitter head or antenna assembly, may jeopardize safety and is
prohibited.
Unauthorized changes to the product are strictly prohibited as they may
unintentionally and unpredictably alter performance and jeopardize safety.
Unauthorized changes that interfere with the integrity of the welds or flanges, such as
making additional perforations, compromise product integrity and safety. Equipment
ratings and certifications are no longer valid on any products that have been damaged
or modified without the prior written permission of Emerson Process Management.
Any continued use of product that has been damaged or modified without prior
written authorization is at the customer's sole risk and expense.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating environment of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations specifications. See “Product Certifications” on
page 217 in this manual.
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, disconnect power
before servicing.
In an Explosion-proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter cover
when power is applied to the unit.
Before connecting a HART®, FOUNDATION™ fieldbus, or Modbus® based communicator
in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments in the loop are installed in
accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.
To avoid process leaks, only use O-rings designed to seal with the corresponding
flange adapter.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Make sure the main power to the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is off and the
lines to any other external power source are disconnected or not powered while wiring
the transmitter.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces (e.g. Rod antenna and Process Seal antenna)
may generate an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under extreme
conditions.
Therefore, when the antenna is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere,
appropriate measures must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
6
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 1: Introduction
November 2014
Introduction
7
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
Section 2 Transmitter Overview
Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
System architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Process characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Components of the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Antenna selection guide/measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
2.1 Theory of operation
The Rosemount 5400 Series Radar Transmitter is a smart, two-wire continuous level transmitter.
A 5400 transmitter is installed at the top of the tank and emits short microwave pulses towards
the product surface in the tank. When a pulse reaches the surface, part of the energy is reflected
back to the antenna for subsequent processing by the transmitter electronics. The time
difference between the transmitted and reflected pulse is detected by a micro-processor and is
converted into a distance, which calculates the level.
The product level is related to the tank height and the measured distance by the following
expression:
Level = Tank Height - Distance
Figure 2-1. Measurement Principle for the Rosemount 5400 Series
Time
Level Distance
Tank Height
Signal Amplitude
Radar Pulse
8
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
2.2 Application examples
Tanks, vessels, and containers with calm surfaces
Non-contacting radar can be used in less challenging applications,
such as storage and buffer tanks:
It is easy to mount, maintenance-free, and highly accurate
Gives precise monitoring and control of the process
Overfill and underfill detection
The Rosemount 5400 Series can be advantageous in risk reduction
systems:
Continuous measurement may reduce or simplify proof-tests
Multiple 5400s can be used in the same tank
Corrosives
Radar measurement is ideal for most corrosive products, such as
caustics, acids, solvents, and many other chemicals:
Does not contact the process product
Wide material offering such as PTFE, Alloy C-276 and Alloy 400
Works well in non-metallic tanks also
Sticky, viscous, and crystallizing products
The best-in-class Rosemount 5400 Series provides an accurate and
reliable level reading with difficult products, such as resins and
adhesives:
Non-contacting is best practice
Almost unaffected by coating and build-up because of the
uniquely designed condensation resistant antennas
Sludges and slurries
Applications like mud, pulp-stock, and lime slurries are ideal for
non-contacting measurement:
Immune to splashing and solids content
Unaffected by density changes
No re-calibration, no or little maintenance
9
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
Reactor vessels
The innovative design of the Rosemount 5400 Series makes it an
excellent choice for the most difficult applications, such as reactor
vessels:
Unique circular polarization provides greater mounting
flexibility – no tank wall clearance distance is needed
Direct measurement – independent of most variations in
process conditions, such as density, dielectric, vapor,
temperature, and pressure
Can handle turbulent conditions created by agitation,
top-filling, or process reaction
Mounting flexibility
The versatile Rosemount 5400 Series can be used in mounting
configurations other than standard nozzles:
Fits most existing pipes: 2-8 in. (50-200 mm)
Easy to isolate from the process – use a ball-valve
Still-pipes reduce the influence of foam, turbulence, and tank
obstructions. Ball-valves can be used on both still-pipes and
nozzles.
Underground tanks
The mounting flexibility of the Rosemount 5400 Series makes it an
excellent choice for many underground tanks:
Easy top-mounting
Can handle long narrow nozzles up to 6 ft (2 m) as long as they
are clean and smooth, and pipes
Unaffected by dirty products with solids content
10
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
2.3 System architecture
The Rosemount 5400 Series Radar Transmitter is loop-powered, and uses the same two wires
for power supply and output signal. The output is a 4-20 mA analog signal superimposed with a
digital HART®, FOUNDATION™ fieldbus or Modbus® signal.
By using the optional HART Tri-Loop™, the HART signal can be converted up to three additional
4-20 mA analog signals.
With the HART protocol, multidrop configuration is possible. In this case, communication is
restricted to digital, since current is fixed to the 4 mA minimum value.
The transmitter can be connected to a Rosemount 751 Field Signal Indicator, or it can be
equipped with an integral display.
The transmitter can easily be configured using a Field Communicator or a PC with the
Rosemount Radar Master (RRM) software. Rosemount 5400 Series transmitters can also be
configured with the AMS® Suite and DeltaV™ software, and other tools that support Electronic
Device Description Language (EDDL) functionality.
For HART communication, a minimum load resistance of 250 : within the loop is required.
Figure 2-2. HART System Architecture
Integral
Display
Rosemount 5400 Series
Radar Transmitter
Rosemount 751 Field
Signal Indicator
Field
Communicator
Tri-Loop
3 x 4-20 mA
DCS
HART modem
RRM or
AMS Suite
11
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
Figure 2-3. FOUNDATION fieldbus System Architecture
The RS-485 Modbus version communicates by Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, and Level Master
Protocols.
HART communication is used for configuration via HART terminals, or tunneling via the RS-485.
Figure 2-4. RS-485 with Modbus Communication
FOUNDATION
fieldbus
Note
Intrinsically safe
installations may
allow fewer devices
per I.S. barrier due to
current limitations.
Host / DCS system (e.g. DeltaV) Maintenance
Field
Communicator
Rosemount
5401
Rosemount
5402
Rosemount
5601
Fieldbus Modem
H1 - Low Speed Field Bus
6200 ft (1900 m) max
(depending upon cable
characteristics)
Configuration with RRM
(hooked up on Fieldbus
segment)
H2 - High Speed Field Bus
Rosemount 5400
Series Transmitter
HART
Modem
Power
Modbus, Levelmaster
Emulation / RS-485 Control
System
RS-232 / RS-485
Converter
PC
5400 Setup in RRM PC
5400 Setup in RRM
through Tunneling
Field Communicator
12
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
2.4 Process characteristics
Dielectric constant
A key parameter for measurement performance is reflectivity. A high dielectric constant of the
media provides better reflection and enables a longer measuring range.
Foam
Rosemount 5400 Series Radar Transmitter measurement in foamy applications depends on the
foam properties; light and airy or dense and heavy, high or low dielectrics, etc. If the foam is
conductive and creamy, the transmitter may measure the surface of the foam. If the foam is less
conductive, the microwaves may penetrate the foam and measure the liquid surface.
Turbulence
A calm surface gives better reflection than a turbulent surface. For turbulent applications, the
maximum range of the radar transmitters is reduced. The range depends on the frequency, the
antenna size, the dielectric of the material, and the degree of turbulence. Consult Tables 2-2 and
2-3 on page 16 for the expected maximum range with the variables listed.
Temperature/pressure/density and vapor
Temperature, pressure, product density, and vapor generally have no impact on measurements.
Condensation
For applications where heavy condensation and vapors may occur, the low frequency version
Rosemount 5401 is recommended.
Tank characteristics
The conditions inside the tank have a significant impact on measurement performance. For
more information see “Vessel characteristics” on page 35.
Solid surface
The surface of solid materials is rarely flat or horizontal. The angle of repose, or surface
inclination, will change as the vessel fills and empties. There is often a lot of dust during the fill
cycle. The dielectric value of many solids is fairly low. See Table 2-1 on page 2-13 for common
solids characteristics.
For solids applications, the high frequency version Rosemount 5402 with 4 inch cone antenna is
available.
13
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
Table 2-1. Sample Solids Applications(1)
Applications
Common characteristics
Particle size Vapor space
Dust or
Powder
Small
(<1 in.)
Larger
(>1 in.) Dust
Steam or
Condensation
Wood chip bins Yes Yes Yes Yes Possible
Grain silo - small
kernel grains Yes Yes No Yes No
Grain silo - large
kernel grains No Yes No No No
Lime stone silo No Yes Yes Possible No
Cement - raw mill silo Yes Yes No Yes No
Cement - finished
product silo Yes Yes No Yes No
Coal bin Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Saw dust Yes Yes No Yes No
High consistency -
pulp stock No No No No Yes
Alumina Yes Yes No Yes No
Salt No Yes Yes No No
(1) Air purging might be needed in dusty environments.
14
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
2.5 Components of the transmitter
The Rosemount 5400 Series Radar Transmitter is available with a die-cast aluminum or stainless
steel (SST) housing containing advanced electronics for signal processing.
The radar electronics produces an electromagnetic pulse that is emitted through the antenna.
There are different antenna types and sizes available for various applications.
The transmitter head has separate compartments for electronics and terminals, and can be
removed without opening the tank. The head has two entries for conduit/cable connections.
The tank connection consists of a Tank Seal and a flange (ANSI, EN (DIN) or JIS).
Figure 2-5. Transmitter Components
B
G
H
AE
F
D
C
A. Display Panel
B. Cable Entry: ½" NPT.
Optional adapters: M20
C. Tank Seal
D. Flange
E. Terminal side
F. Cable Entry: ½" NPT.
Optional adapters: M20
G. Transmitter head with Radar electronics
H. Antenna
15
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
2.6 Antenna selection guide/measuring range
The measuring range depends on the microwave frequency, antenna size, the dielectric
constant (Hr) of the liquid, and process conditions. A higher dielectric constant value produces a
stronger reflection. The figures in the tables below are guidelines for optimum performance.
Larger measuring ranges may be possible. For more information, contact your local Emerson
Process Management representative.
A. Oil, gasoline or other hydrocarbons, and petrochemicals (Hr = 1.9-4.0). In pipes or with
ideal surface conditions, for some liquefied gases (Hr = 1.4-4.0).
B. Alcohols, concentrated acids, organic solvents, oil/water mixtures, and acetone
(Hr = 4.0-10.0).
C. Conductive liquids, e.g. water based solutions, dilute acids, and alkalis (Hr > 10.0).
Table 2-2. Rosemount 5402, Maximum Recommended Measuring Range, ft (m)
High
frequency
antennas
Dielectric constant(1)
(1) A. Oil, gasoline or other hydrocarbons, and petrochemicals (Hr = 1.9-4.0)
In pipes or with ideal surface conditions, for some liquefied gases (Hr = 1.4-4.0)
B. Alcohols, concentrated acids, organic solvents, oil/water mixtures, and acetone (Hr = 4.0-10.0)
C. Conductive liquids, e.g. water based solutions, dilute acids, and alkalis (Hr > 10.0)
A B C A B C A B C
2-in. Cone/
Process seal 33 (10) 49 (15) 66 (20) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 9.8 (3) 20 (6) 33 (10)
3-in. Cone/
Process seal 49 (15) 66 (20) 98 (30) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 13 (4) 30 (9) 39 (12)
4-in. Cone/
Process seal 66 (20) 82 (25) 115 (35) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 23 (7) 39 (12) 49 (15)
16
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
Table 2-3. Rosemount 5401, Maximum Recommended Measuring Range, ft (m)
Low
Frequency
Antennas
Dielectric Constant(1)
(1) a. Oil, gasoline or other hydrocarbons, and petrochemicals (Hr = 1.9-4.0)
In pipes or with ideal surface conditions, for some liquefied gases (Hr = 1.4-4.0)
b. Alcohols, concentrated acids, organic solvents, oil/water mixtures, and acetone (Hr = 4.0-10.0)
c. Conductive liquids, e.g. water based solutions, dilute acids, and alkalis (Hr > 10.0)
a b c a b c a b c
3-in. Cone(2)
(2) Pipe installations only. NA = Not Applicable.
NA NA NA 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) NA NA NA
4-in. Cone /
Rod(3)
(3) Pipe installations are not allowed with rod antennas.
23 (7) 39 (12) 49 (15) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 13 (4) 26 (8) 39 (12)
6-in. Cone 43 (13) 66 (20) 82 (25) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 20 (6) 33 (10) 46 (14)
8-in. Cone 66 (20) 82 (25) 115 (35) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 26 (8) 39 (12) 52 (16)
17
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
Table 2-4. Model and Antenna Guide
Model and antenna guide 5402 5401
This table gives guidelines on which
model and antenna to select, depending
on application.
G = Good
AD = Application Dependent (consult
your local Emerson Process
Management representative)
NR = Not Recommended
Cone (preferred) Process seal Cone (preferred) Rod
Best choice for a
broad range of
applications, free
propagation and pipe
installations.
Ideal for small tanks
and corrosive
applications. Also good
for heavy antenna
condensation/build-up.
Suitable for some
extreme process
conditions.
Suitable for small
process connections,
and corrosive
environment.
Tank considerations
Installation close to smooth tank wall G G G G
Multiple units on the same tank G G G G
Internal obstructions, directly in path(1) NR NR AD AD
Internal obstructions, avoidance(1)
(1) The obstruction should not be within the radar beam. Preferred choices due to more narrow radar beam: Model 5402, and cone antenna.
G G NR NR
Beam angle 2” 19°
3” 14°
4” 9°
2” 19°
3” 14°
4” 9°
4” 37°
6” 23°
8” 17°
37°
Antenna extends below nozzle G G G G
Antenna recessed in smooth nozzle up to
6 ft (2 m) GG NR
(2)
(2) If tall nozzle, use extended antenna.
NR(3)
(3) The active part must protrude beneath the nozzle.
Antenna recessed in nozzle with
irregularities, such as bad welds AD(4)
(4) An extended cone antenna must be used.
AD AD(4) NR(3)
Stilling well mounting G 2”- 4” pipe G 2”- 4” pipe G 3”- 8” pipe NR
Valves G G NR NR
Long ranges (>115’ / 35 m) NR NR NR NR
Cleanability of antenna AD G AD G
Process medium characteristics
Vapor (light, medium) G G G G
Vapor (heavy) NR AD G G
Condensing vapor/product build-up(5)
(5) Build-up can often be avoided or reduced by using heat-tracing or cleaning arrangements.
AD G G AD
Boiling/Turbulent surface (low/medium) G G G G
Boiling/Turbulent surface (heavy) AD AD G(6)
(6) Use a 6 or 8 in. (150-200 mm) cone antenna.
NR
Boiling/Turbulent surface (still-pipe) G G G NR
Foam(7)
(7) Foam can either reflect, be invisible, or absorb the radar signal. Pipe mounting is advantageous since it reduces the foaming tendency.
NR NR AD AD
Foam (still-pipe)(7) GG GNR
Corrosive products (options available) G(8)
(8) Other wetted material options include Alloy C-276 and Alloy 400. See the Rosemount 5400 Series Product Data Sheet (Document No. 00813-0100-4026) for details.
G(8) G(8) G
Materials with very low dielectric G G G AD
Changing density/dielectric/pH/
pressure/temperature GG GG
Coating/viscous/crystallizing liquids G G G G
Solids, granules, powders G NR NR NR
18
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 2: Transmitter Overview
November 2014
Transmitter Overview
19
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
Section 3 Mechanical Installation
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19
Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 21
Mounting considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 22
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 36
3.1 Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
20
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
Failure to follow safe installation and service guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform installation or service.
Use the equipment only as specified in this manual. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Any substitution of non-recognized spare parts may jeopardize safety. Repair, e.g.
substitution of components etc. may also jeopardize safety and is under no
circumstances allowed.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
Make sure that the transmitter is handled carefully. If the Process Seal is damaged, gas
might escape from the tank if the transmitter head is removed from the antenna.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating environment of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations specifications.
In an Explosion-proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter cover
when power is applied to the unit.
Before connecting a HART®-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Make sure the main power to the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is off and the
lines to any other external power source are disconnected or not powered while wiring
the transmitter.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces (e.g. Rod antenna and Process Seal antenna)
may generate an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under extreme
conditions.
Therefore, when the antenna is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere,
appropriate measures must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
21
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.2 Installation procedure
Follow these steps for proper installation:
Review installation
considerations
(see page 22)
Mount the transmitter
(see page 36)
Wire the transmitter
(see page 43)
Make sure covers and
cable/conduit
connections are tight
Power up the
transmitter
Configure the
transmitter
(see page 73)
Verify measurements
Ground the housing
(see page 46)
22
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.3 Mounting considerations
Before installing a Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter, consider specific mounting
requirements, vessel, and process characteristics.
3.3.1 Mounting location
For optimal performance, the transmitter should be installed in locations with a clear and
unobstructed view of the level surface (A):
Filling inlets creating turbulence (B), and stationary metallic objects with horizontal
surfaces (C) should be kept outside the signal beam – see page 33 for beamwidth
information
Agitators with large horizontal blades may reduce the performance of the transmitter,
so install the transmitter in a location where this effect is minimized. Vertical or slanted
blades are often invisible to radar, but create turbulence (D)
Do not install the transmitter in the center of the tank (E)
Because of circular polarization, there is no clearance distance requirement from the
tank wall if it is flat and free of obstructions such as heating coils and ladders (F).
Usually, the optimal location is 1/4 of the diameter from the tank wall
Note
Proper mounting position is important to consider.
Figure 3-1. Proper Mounting Position
The antenna is normally aligned vertically
(D) (A) (E) (B) (F) (C)
23
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
A metal still-pipe can be used to avoid disturbing objects, turbulence, and foam (G)
Figure 3-2. Mounting in Still-Pipe
The walls in non-metallic tanks are invisible to the radar signal, so nearby objects
outside of the tank may be detected
Choose the largest possible antenna diameter for installation. A larger antenna
concentrates the radar beam, will be less susceptible to obstruction interference, and
assures maximum antenna gain
Multiple Rosemount 5400 Series transmitters can be used in the same tank without
interfering with each other (H)
Figure 3-3. Multiple Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitters in the Same Tank
(G)
(H)
24
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.3.2 Special considerations in solids applications
The transmitter should be mounted as close to the center of the tank as possible, but
not in the center of the tank. A general practice is to mount the transmitter at 2/3 tank
radius from the tank wall, see Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4. Transmitter Location in Solids Applications
The radar signal must never be shaded by the inlet nor the injected product, see
Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5. Install the Transmitter with a Clear and Unobstructed View
25
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.3.3 Mounting in pipes
Still-pipe mounting is recommended for tanks with extremely turbulent surface conditions. All
cone antenna sizes for the Rosemount 5400 Series of transmitters can be used for Still-pipe
installations. The 3 in. (75 mm) antenna for the 5401 is designed for use in Still-pipes only. Rod
antennas are not recommended for Still-pipes.
When the transmitter is mounted on a Still-pipe, the inclination should be
within 1°. The gap between the antenna and the Still-pipe may be up to 0.2 in. (5 mm).
Figure 3-6. Mount the Transmitter Vertically
Recommendations for pipe installations
The pipe interior must be smooth
Not suitable for adhesive products
At least one hole is above the product surface
The hole diameter Ø should not exceed 10 % of the pipe diameter D
Holes should only be drilled on one side
Max. 0.2 in
(5 mm)
max. 1 °
26
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
Figure 3-7. Recommended Hole Size for Pipe Installations
3.3.4 Installation considerations
Generally, the radar signal is unaffected by condensation and low pressure steam. If affected,
the lower microwave frequencies are less affected. The critical point is the tank penetration,
which acts as a cold spot, where the condensation will form. The radar antenna is located at this
cold spot.
If droplets of water build up on the antenna parts, the microwave signal may get partially or
even entirely blocked if the antenna is not designed for easy drip-off. Therefore, here it is
beneficial to use as large opening for the microwaves as possible, which is the main reason for
the oversized PTFE seal in the Rosemount 5400 Series Cone Antennas. An even better solution is
to use a Process Seal Antenna if the process pressure permits that.
To reduce the cold spot within the nozzle, it is always recommended to insulate the nozzle. By
doing so, the temperature in the nozzle will be the same as in the rest of the vessel and
condensation will thus be reduced. If the temperature in the tank is much higher than the
ambient temperature (i.e. tank is heated and located in a cold area), it might be necessary to
heat trace the nozzle in addition to the insulation.
Figure 3-8. Insulate Nozzle to Avoid Condensation
min. 6 in. (150 mm)
max. Ø: D/10.
D
27
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.3.5 Nozzle considerations
Special considerations may have to be taken because of the nozzle, depending on the selection
of transmitter model and antenna.
5402 with cone antenna
The antenna can be recessed in smooth nozzles up to 6 ft (2 m). If the inside of the nozzle
contains disturbing objects, use the extended cone (I).
Figure 3-9. Nozzle Considerations for 5402 with Cone Antenna
5402 with process seal antenna
The antenna can be used on nozzles up to 6 ft (2 m), (J). Disturbing objects inside the nozzle (K)
may impact the measurement, and should therefore be avoided.
The flange on the tank should have a flat or raised face. Other tank flanges may be possible,
please consult your local Emerson Process Management representative for advice.
Figure 3-10. Nozzle Considerations for 5402 with Process Seal Antenna
Spray nozzle
(I)
Smooth nozzle Bad weldings
(K) Bad welding
(J)
28
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
5401 with cone antenna
The antenna should extend 0.4 in. (10 mm), or more, below the nozzle (L). If required, use the
extended cone solution.
Figure 3-11. Nozzle Considerations for 5401 with Cone Antenna
5401 with rod antenna
The active part of the rod antenna should protrude below the nozzle (M).
Figure 3-12. Nozzle Considerations for 5401 with Rod Antenna
Still-pipes in metallic materials
If used correctly, pipe measurement can be advantageous in many applications:
The 5402 is the preferred choice for smaller pipe diameters
Use the 5401 for larger pipe diameters (6-8 in./150-200 mm),
pipes with larger holes or slots, or for dirty/sticky media
Use cone or process seal antennas - not the rod antenna
The gap between the cone antenna and the still-pipe is limited to 0.2 in. (5 mm). If
required, order an oversized antenna and cut on location (N). Only applicable to 5401
cone antennas and cone antennas with wetted flange plate (i.e. straight antennas).
The inside of the chamber must be of a constant diameter
(L) 0.4 in. (10 mm) or more
Active part
starts here
(M) Max. 4 or 10 in.
(100 or 250 mm)
for short and
long version
respectively
29
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
Note
Match antenna size to the stilling well diameter.
Figure 3-13. Nozzle Considerations for Still-Pipes in Metallic Materials
Ball-valve installation
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter can be isolated from the process by using a valve:
The 5402 is the preferred choice for long nozzle measurement
Use the largest possible antenna
Use a full-port ball valve
Ensure there is no edge between the ball valve and the nozzle or stilling well, the inside
should be smooth
Valves can be combined with stilling wells
(N)
Max. 0.2 in.
(5 mm)
30
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.3.6 Nozzle recommendations and requirements
The Rosemount 5400 Series is mounted on a nozzle by using appropriate flanges. For best
performance, it is recommended that the nozzle meets the following recommendations for
height (L) and diameter:
Figure 3-14. Mounting of the Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitter
Table 3-1. Minimum Nozzle Diameter and Recommended Maximum Nozzle Height for Cone Antennas
Model Antenna / material L max
in. (mm)
Min. diameter
in. (mm)
5402(1) Cone 2 in. (50 mm) SST 6.1 (155) 2.2 (55)
Cone 3 in. (75 mm) SST 5.5 (140) 2.8 (72)
Cone 4 in. (100 mm) SST 8.5 (215) 3.8 (97)
Cone 2 in. (50 mm) Alloy C-276, Alloy 400 5.5 (140) 2.2 (55)
Cone 3 in. (75 mm) Alloy C-276, Alloy 400 6.5 (165) 2.8 (72)
Cone 4 in. (100 mm) Alloy C-276, Alloy 400 9.6 (240) 3.8 (97)
5401 Cone 3 in. (75 mm) SST Pipe installations only
Cone 4 in. (100 mm) SST 5.5 (140) 3.8 (97)
Cone 6 in. (150 mm) SST 6.9 (175) 5.7 (145)
Cone 8 in. (200 mm) SST 10.2 (260) 7.6 (193)
Cone 3 in. (75 mm) Alloy C-276, Alloy 400 Pipe installations only
Cone 4 in. (100 mm) Alloy C-276, Alloy 400 5.5 (140) 3.8 (97)
Cone 6 in. (150 mm) Alloy C-276, Alloy 400 6.9 (175) 5.7 (145)
Cone 8 in. (200 mm) Alloy C-276, Alloy 400 10.2 (260) 7.6 (193)
L
Minimum diameter
> 0.4 in.
(10 mm)
Minimum diameter
L
L
Minimum diameter
Minimum diameter
L
Process seal antenna Rod antenna Cone antenna Extended cone antenna
> 0.4 in.
(10 mm)
31
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
Table 3-2. Minimum Nozzle Diameter and Maximum Nozzle Height for Rod Antennas
Table 3-3. Minimum Nozzle Diameter and Recommended Maximum Nozzle Height for Process Seal
Antennas
Table 3-4. Minimum Nozzle Diameter and Maximum Nozzle Height for Extended Cone Antennas
Install the transmitter as follows:
Align the antenna vertically.
Choose the largest antenna diameter possible. A larger receiving area concentrates the
radar beam and ensures maximum antenna gain. Increased antenna gain permits
greater margin for weak surface echoes. A larger antenna also results in smaller beam
angle and thereby, less interference from any internal structures in the tank.
For best measurement performance, the antenna should extend below the nozzle
0.4 in. (10 mm) or more.
For more information, see “Nozzle considerations” on page 27.
(1) For Rosemount 5402, the values for maximum nozzle height are recommendations. Note that the Rosemount 5402
with cone antenna can be recessed in smooth nozzles up to 6 ft (2m).
Model Antenna L max in. (mm) Min. diameter in. (mm)
5401(1)
(1) For Rosemount 5401, the values for minimum nozzle diameter and maximum nozzle height are requirements.
Rod (short) 4.0 (100) 1.5 (38)
Rod (long) 10 (250) 1.5 (38)
Model Antenna L max in. (mm) Min. diameter in. (mm)
5402(1)
(1) For Rosemount 5402, the values for maximum nozzle height are recommendations. Note that the Rosemount 5402
with process seal antenna can be recessed in smooth nozzles up to 6 ft (2m).
Process Seal 2 in. (50 mm) 19.7 (500) 2.0 (51)
Process Seal 3 in. (75 mm) 19.7 (500) 3.0 (77)
Process Seal 4 in. (100 mm) 19.7 (500) 4.0 (102)
Model Antenna L max
in. (mm)
Min. diameter
in. (mm)
5402(1)
(1) For Rosemount 5402, the values for maximum nozzle height are recommendations.
Extended Cone Antenna, S3(2)
(2) The extended cone antennas are available in 5 in. (125 mm) step increments from 10 to 50 in. (250-1250 mm). Consult
your local Emerson Process Management representative for more information. Expect long lead times for sizes other
than the 20 in. (500 mm) version.
20 in. (500 mm) See Table 3-1
5401 Extended Cone Antenna, S3(2) 20 in. (500 mm) See Table 3-1
32
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.3.7 Service space
For easy access to the transmitter, mount it with sufficient service space.
There is no requirement on clearance distance from the tank wall, provided it is flat and free of
obstructions such as heating coils and ladders. The optimal location is often 1/4 of the tank
diameter.
Figure 3-15. Service Space Recommendations
Service space Antenna type Distance in. (mm)
A Cone, rod, process seal 20 (500)
BCone, rod 24 (600)
Process seal 33 (850)
Inclination Antenna type Maximum angle
CCone, rod, process seal3°
A
B
C
Rod antenna Cone antenna
A
B
C
C
B
A
Process seal antenna
33
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.3.8 Beamwidth
The following recommendations should be considered when mounting the transmitter:
The transmitter should be mounted with as few internal structures as possible within
the beam angle
The flat tank wall can be located within the antenna beam angle if there is a minimum
distance from the transmitter to the tank wall (see Figure 3-15 for preferred
installation)
Figure 3-16. Beamwidth at Various Distances from the Flange
Table 3-5. Beamwidth for the Rosemount 5402 Model (in ft [m])
Distance
Antenna
2 in. (DN 50) cone/
process seal
3 in. (DN 80) cone/
process seal
4 in. (DN 100) cone/
process seal
16 ft (5 m) 4.9 (1.5) 3.3 (1.0) 3.3 (1.0)
33 ft (10 m) 9.8 (3.0) 6.6 (2.0) 4.9 (1.5)
49 ft (15 m) 14.8 (4.5) 9.8 (3.0) 8.2 (2.5)
66 ft (20 m) 19.7 (6.0) 13.1 (4.0) 9.8 (3.0)
Distance
5401
(low frequency)
5402
(high frequency)
16 ft (5 m)
33 ft (10 m)
49 ft (15 m)
66 ft (20 m)
Beamwidth
34
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
Table 3-6. Beamwidth for the Rosemount 5401 Model (in ft [m])
Figure 3-17. Beam Angle
Table 3-7. Beam Angle for the Rosemount 5402
Table 3-8. Beam Angle for the Rosemount 5401
Distance
Antenna
4 in. (DN 100)
cone /rod
6 in. (DN 150)
cone
8 in. (DN 200)
cone
16 ft (5 m) 9.8 (3..0) 6.6 (2.0) 4.9 (1.5)
33 ft (10 m) 21.3 (6.5) 13.1 (4.0) 9.8 (3.0)
49 ft (15 m) 32.8 (10) 19.7 (6.0) 14.8 (4.5)
66 ft (20 m) 41 (12.5) 26.2 (8.0) 19.7 (6.0)
Antenna Beam angle
2 in. (50 mm) cone / process seal 19°
3 in. (75 mm) cone / process seal 14°
4 in. (100 mm) cone / process seal, rod 9°
Antenna Beam angle
3 in. (75 mm) cone Pipe installations only
4 in. (100 mm) cone / rod 37°
6 in. (150 mm) cone 23°
8 in. (200 mm) cone 17°
Beam angle
35
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.3.9 Vessel characteristics
Heating coils, agitators and other objects in the tank may lead to disturbing echoes and noise in
the measurement signal. Vertical structures cause minimal effect since the radar signal is
scattered rather than directed back to the antenna.
The shape of the tank bottom affects the measurement signal when the product surface is close
to the tank bottom. The Rosemount 5400 Series has built-in functions which optimize
measurement performance for various bottom shapes (see “Tank type and tank bottom type”
on page 76).
3.3.10 Disturbing objects
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter should be mounted so that objects such as heating
coils, ladders, etc. are not in the radar signal path. These objects may cause false echoes
resulting in reduced measurement performance. However, the transmitter has built-in functions
designed to reduce the influence from disturbing objects where such objects cannot be totally
avoided.
The Rosemount 5402 has a narrower radar beam that is particularly suitable in installations with
tall or narrow nozzles, or nozzles close to the tank wall. It may also be used to avoid disturbing
objects in the tank.
3.3.11 Valves
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter can be isolated from the process by using a valve:
Use a full-port ball valve.
The 5402 is the required and the Process Seal Antenna is the preferred choice, since it
does not require a spool piece. The cone antenna can also be used.
Ensure there is no edge between the ball valve and the nozzle/pipe, the inside should
be smooth.
Valves can be combined with stilling wells.
36
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.4 Mounting
Mount the transmitter on a nozzle on top of the tank making sure only qualified personnel
perform the installation.
The transmitter housing must not be opened.
If the transmitter housing must be removed for service, make sure the PTFE sealing is carefully
protected against dust and water.
3.4.1 Cone antenna flange connection
Figure 3-18. Mounting the Rosemount 5400 with Cone Antenna and Flange
1. Place a gasket on top of the tank flange.
2. Lower the transmitter with antenna and flange into the tank nozzle.
3. Tighten the bolts and nuts with sufficient torque for the flange and gasket choice.
A
C
H
F
I
G
D
J
E
B
A. Transmitter housing
B. Nut, 40 Nm (30 Lbft)
C. Bolt
D. Nut
E. Locking screw
F. Flange
G. Cone antenna
H. Gasket
I. Tank flange
J. Nozzle
37
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.4.2 Process seal antenna(1)
Figure 3-19. Mounting the Rosemount 5400 with Process Seal and Flange
1. Place the antenna on top of the nozzle.
2. Mount the flange and tighten the bolts cross-wise. For torque information,
see Table 3-9.
3. Mount the transmitter head and tighten the nut to 40 Nm (30 Lbft).
4. Re-tighten the flange bolts after 24 hours.
(1) The mounting information applies to the updated Process Seal antenna design, released in February 2012. Antennas manufactured before
this date have wetted O-rings and require a different installation procedure. For detailed information on the updated Process Seal antenna,
see the Rosemount 5400 Series Reference Manual - Supplementary Information for Process Seal Antennas Manual Supplement (Document
No. 00809-0700-4026).
E
F
A
B
D
G
H
I
C
A. Transmitter housing
B. Nut, 40 Nm (30 Lbft)
C. Nut
D. Locking screw (ATEX)
E. Bolt
F. Flange
G. Process Seal antenna
H. Tank flange
I. Nozzle
38
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
Table 3-9. Tightening Torque for Process Seal Flanges
3.4.3 Rod antenna threaded connection
Figure 3-20. Mounting the Rosemount 5400 with Rod Antenna and Threaded Tank
Connection
1. Lower the transmitter and antenna into the tank.
2. Turn the transmitter until it is properly secured in the process connection.
3. Make sure the cable entries and display face the right direction.
Note
Tank connections with NPT threads require a sealant for pressure-tight joints.
Flange Torque (Nm) Torque (Lbft)
2 in. (50 mm), 150 lb. 40 30
2 in. (50 mm), 300 lb. 40 30
3 in. (75 mm), 150 lb. 60 44
3 in. (75 mm), 300 lb. 60 44
4 in. (100 mm), 150 lb. 50 37
4 in. (100 mm), 300 lb. 50 37
DN 50 PN 40 40 30
DN 80 PN 40 60 44
DN 100 PN 16 50 37
DN 100 PN 40 50 37
50A 10K 40 30
80A 10K 60 44
100A 10K 50 37
150A 10K 50 37
A. Transmitter housing
B. Nut, 60 Nm (44 Lbft)
C. Locking screw (ATEX)
D. Sealant threads
E. Rod antenna
E
D
C
A
B
39
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.4.4 Rod antenna flanged connection
Figure 3-21. Mounting the Rosemount 5400 with Rod Antenna and Flange
1. Place a gasket on top of the tank flange (1). The gasket thickness and material must be
suitable for the process.
2. Lower the transmitter with antenna and flange into the tank nozzle.
3. Tighten the bolts and nuts with sufficient torque for the flange and gasket choice.
(1) Gasket is optional for the All-PFA version of the rod antenna.
C
F
H
J
G
A
B
D
E
I
A. Transmitter housing
B. Bolt
C. Gasket (optional for the All PFA version)
D.Nut
E. Locking screw (ATEX)
F. Flange
G. PFA plate (only All PFA version, 1R, 2R)
H. Tank flange
I. Nozzle
J. Rod antenna
40
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.4.5 Tri-Clamp™ tank connection
Figure 3-22. Mounting the Rosemount 5400 using a Tri-Clamp
1. Place a gasket on top of the tank flange.
2. Lower the transmitter and antenna into the tank.
3. Fasten the Tri-Clamp to the tank with a clamp.
4. To rotate the transmitter housing, loosen the nut.
5. Rotate the transmitter housing so the cable entries / display face the desired direction.
6. Tighten the nut.
C
B
A
D
E
F
A. Nut
B. Rod antenna
C. Gasket
D. Tank connection
E. Tri-Clamp
F. Clamp
41
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.4.6 Bracket mounting on wall
Figure 3-23. Bracket Mounting the Rosemount 5400, on Wall
1. Mount the bracket directly to the wall with screws suitable for the purpose.
2. Mount the transmitter with antenna to the bracket, then secure the installation with
the three supplied screws.
A
C
B
A. Transmitter housing
B. Antenna
C. Bracket
42
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 3: Mechanical Installation
November 2014
Mechanical Installation
3.4.7 Bracket mounting on pipe
Figure 3-24. Bracket Mounting the Rosemount 5400, on Pipe
1. Put the two U-bolts through the holes of the bracket. Holes are available for both
vertical and horizontal pipe mounting.
2. Put the clamping brackets on the U-bolts and around the pipe.
3. Fasten the bracket to the pipe with the four supplied nuts.
4. Mount the transmitter with antenna to the bracket, and secure with the three supplied
screws.
C
G
E
B
A
D
F
A. U-bolts
B. Bracket
C. Clamping bracket
D. Screws
E. Transmitter housing
F. Screw
G. Antenna
43
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Section 4 Electrical Installation
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 43
Wiring and power supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 44
Cable/conduit entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 45
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 46
Cable selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 46
Hazardous areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 47
External circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 47
HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49
FOUNDATION fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 55
HART to Modbus Converter (HMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 60
Establish HART communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 66
Optional devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 69
4.1 Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
44
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Additional warnings or restrictions may apply depending on type of Hazardous approval. See
Appendix B: Product Certifications for details.
4.2 Wiring and power supply requirements
Wiring and power supply requirements can be dependent upon the approval certification. As
with all FOUNDATION™ fieldbus requirements, a conditioned power supply and terminating
resistors are required for proper operation.
Failure to follow safe installation and service guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform installation or service.
Use the equipment only as specified in this manual. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Any substitution of non-recognized spare parts may jeopardize safety. Repair, e.g.
substitution of components etc. may also jeopardize safety and is under no
circumstances allowed.
Do not perform any service other than those contained in this manual unless you are
qualified.
Process leaks could result in death or serious injury.
Make sure that the transmitter is handled carefully. If the process seal is damaged, gas
might escape from the tank if the transmitter head is removed from the antenna.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating environment of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations specifications.
In an Explosion-proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter cover
when power is applied to the unit.
Before connecting a HART®-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Make sure the main power to the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is off and the
lines to any other external power source are disconnected or not powered while wiring
the transmitter.
High voltage that may be present on leads could cause electrical shock.
Avoid contact with leads and terminals.
Make sure the main power to the Rosemount 5400 transmitter is off and the lines to
any other external power source are disconnected or not powered while wiring the
gauge.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces (e.g. rod antenna and process seal antenna)
may generate an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under extreme
conditions.
Therefore, when the antenna is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere,
appropriate measures must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
45
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.3 Cable/conduit entries
The electronics housing has two entries with ½ - 14 NPT threads. Optional M20×1.5 adapters
are also available. The connections shall be according to national, local, and plant electrical
codes.
Properly seal unused ports to prevent moisture or other contamination from entering the
terminal compartment of the electronics housing. Install wiring with a drip loop with the
bottom of the loop lower than the cable/conduit entry.
Figure 4-1. Cable Entries
Note
Use the enclosed metal plug to seal the unused port. The temporary orange plastic plugs used
at delivery are not sufficient seals! Failure to use the metal plug to seal the unused port
invalidates product certification.
4.3.1 Conduit electrical connector wiring (using minifast®)
For wiring details, refer to pin-out drawing and the cordset manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
Figure 4-2. Quick Connect Housing Pin-Out
For Rosemount 5400 Series transmitters with conduit electrical connector M, refer to the
cordset manufacturer’s installation instructions for wiring details.
Remove the orange protective plastic plugs, used for transportation.
Seal any unused port with the enclosed metal plug.
Cable Entry
(see Figure
2-5 on
page 14)
Cable Entry (see
Figure 2-5 on
page 14)
“+”
“-”
No connection
Ground
46
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.4 Grounding
When wiring the transmitters, the grounding should be completed such that:
The loop is grounded at the power supply.
When transmitters are installed on metal tanks, ensure there is a metal-to-metal
connection between the device and the tank.
If the tank is non-metallic, the housing must be grounded to an earth ground that is
separate from the power supply. The external ground terminal may be used for this
purpose.
If the tank is cathodically protected, the housing must be grounded to an earth ground
that is outside of the cathodic protection system ground. Use the external terminal for
this purpose.
When transient protection terminal block is used, the ground wire should be separate from the
signal wire. Use the external ground terminal.
Make sure grounding is done (including IS ground inside Terminal compartment) according to
Hazardous Locations Certifications, national and local electrical codes.
The most effective transmitter housing grounding method is a direct connection to earth
ground with minimal (< 1 :) impedance.
Note
Grounding the transmitter housing using the threaded conduit connection may not provide a
sufficient ground. The transient protection terminal block will not provide transient protection
unless the transmitter housing is properly grounded. Use the above guidelines to ground the
transmitter housing. Do not run transient protection ground wire with signal wiring; the ground
wire may carry excessive current if a lightning strike occurs.
Note
After installation and commissioning, make sure that no ground currents exist from high
ground potential differences in the installation.
4.5 Cable selection
Use shielded twisted pair wiring for the Rosemount 5400 Series. The cables must be suitable for
the supply voltage and approved for use in hazardous areas, where applicable. For instance, in
the U.S., explosion-proof conduits must be used in the vicinity of the vessel. For the ATEX
flameproof approval version of the Rosemount 5400 Series, suitable conduits with sealing
device or flameproof cable glands must be used depending on local requirements.
Use 18 AWG to 12 AWG wiring to minimize the voltage drop to the transmitter.
For Modbus® units (RS-485 bus), the following rules apply:
2 cables are used for communication: 24 AWG shielded twisted pair wiring is
recommended to get an impedance of 120 :
2 cables are used for power: AWG 16-18 cables must be used
47
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Note
Avoid running instrument cable next to power cables in cable trays or near heavy electrical
equipment.
It is important that the instrument cable shield be:
- trimmed close and insulated from touching the transmitter housing
- continuously connected throughout the segment
- connected to a good earth ground at the power supply end
4.6 Hazardous areas
When the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is installed in a hazardous area, all national and
local regulations and specifications in applicable certificates must be observed.
4.7 External circuit breaker
For compliance with Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, an external circuit breaker should be
installed.
4.7.1 Connecting the transmitter
The Rosemount 5400 Series accepts power supplies ranging from 16 Vdc to 42.4 Vdc. It uses
4-20 mA power superimposed with a HART signal.
To connect the transmitter:
1. Verify that the power supply is disconnected.
2. Remove the terminal block cover (see Figure 4-3).
3. Pull the cable through the cable gland/conduit. For explosion-proof/ flameproof
installations, only use cable glands or conduit entry devices certified explosion-proof or
flameproof. Install the wiring with a drip loop where the bottom of the loop must be
lower than the cable/conduit entry.
4. To connect the wires, see the illustrations on the following pages.
5. Remove the orange protective plastic plugs used for transportation. Seal any unused
port with the enclosed metal plug.
6. Mount the cover and make sure it is fully engaged to meet explosion-proof
requirements (adapters are required if M20 glands are used).
For ATEX, IECEx, NEPSI, INMETRO, and TIIS installations, lock the cover with the locking
screw.
7. Connect the power supply.
Note
Use PTFE tape or other sealant at the NPT threads in the cable entries.
48
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Figure 4-3. Terminal Compartment and External Ground Screw
Note
Remove the orange, protective, plastic plugs, used for transportation. Seal any unused port with
the enclosed metal plug.
Cable entry
NPT ½ in.-14, or
M20 X 1.5 adapter
External ground
screw
Blind plug
Supplied for unused
conduit opening.
Terminals for signal
and power supply
Cable entry
NPT ½ in.-14,
or M20 X 1.5
adapter
Locking screw
Internal ground
screw
49
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.8 HART
4.8.1 Power requirements
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter operates with a power supply ranging from
16 - 42.4 Vdc (16 - 30 Vdc in IS applications, 20 - 42.4 Vdc in explosion-proof / flameproof
applications and in non-sparking / energy-limited applications).
All configuration tools for HART communication, such as the Field Communicator and
Rosemount Radar Master, require a minimum load resistance (RL) of 250 : within the loop in
order to function properly.
Terminals in the transmitter housing provide connections for signal wiring. The Rosemount
5400 Series operates with the following power supplies:
Table 4-1. Minimum Input Voltage (UI) at Different Currents
4.8.2 Load limitations
Maximum load resistance (R) is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply
(UE), as described by:
Figure 4-4. Non-Hazardous Installations, and Non-Sparking / Energy-Limited Power
Supply
Hazardous approval
Current
3.75 mA 21.75 mA
Minimum input voltage (UI)
Non-Hazardous Installations and
Intrinsically Safe Installations 16 Vdc 11 Vdc
Explosion-proof / Flameproof
Installations 20 Vdc 15.5 Vdc
10 2016 30
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
40 50
42.424
586
1387
External Power Supply Voltage UE(V)
Maximum Load Resistance R(W)
Operating
region
50
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Figure 4-5. Intrinsically Safe Installations
Figure 4-6. Explosion-Proof / Flameproof Installations
Note
For flameproof/explosion-proof installations, the diagram is only valid if the HART load
resistance is at the + side and if the - side is grounded. Otherwise, the load resistance value is
limited to 435 :.
Note
Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitters with flameproof/explosion-proof output have a built-in
barrier; no external barrier needed.
External Power Supply Voltage UE(V)
Maximum Load Resistance R(W)
Operating
region
10 20 30
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
40 50
24 42.4
1148
348
External Power Supply Voltage UE(V)
Maximum Load Resistance R(W)
Operating
region
51
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.8.3 Non-intrinsically safe power supply
With a non-intrinsically safe power supply in non-hazardous installations or explo-
sion-proof/flameproof installations, wire the transmitter as shown in Figure 4-7.
Note
Make sure the power supply is off when connecting the transmitter.
Figure 4-7. Wiring for Non-Intrinsically Safe Power Supply (HART)
The Field Communicator and the HART modem require a minimum load resistance of 250 :
within the loop to function properly.
Note
The diagram is valid only if the HART load resistance is at the + side and if the - side is grounded,
otherwise the load resistance value is limited to 435 :.
Note
For explosion-proof/flameproof installations make sure the transmitter is grounded to the I.S.
ground terminal inside the terminal compartment in accordance with national and local
electrical codes.
Rosemount 5400 Series Radar
Level Transmitter
Field Communicator
HART
modem
Load Resistance 250 W
Power
Supply
PC
52
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.8.4 Intrinsically safe power supply
With an intrinsically safe power supply, wire the transmitter as shown in Figure 4-8.
Note
Make sure the instruments in the loop are installed according to intrinsically safe field wiring
practices.
Installation also needs to comply with the applicable installation/control drawing. See “Approval
drawings” on page 230.
Figure 4-8. Wiring Diagram for Intrinsically Safe Power Supply (HART)
The Field Communicator and the HART modem require a minimum load resistance within the
loop of 250 : to function properly. For maximum load resistance see Figure 4-5.
For Safety Instrumented Systems information, see Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems
(4-20 mA Only).
For IS parameters, see Appendix B: Product Certifications.
Rosemount 5400 Series
radar level transmitter
Approved IS barrier
RL=250 W
Power
supply
Field communicator
HART
modem
PC
53
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.8.5 Type N approvals: non-sparking / energy-limited power
supply
With a non-sparking / energy- limited power supply, wire the transmitter as shown in
Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9. Wiring Diagram for Non-Sparking / Energy-Limited Power Supply (HART)
Rosemount 5400 Series Radar
Level Transmitter
Field Communicator
HART
modem
Load Resistance 250 W
Power
Supply
PC
HART: Un=42.4 V
54
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.8.6 Transient protection terminal block
For a terminal block with transient protection, wire the transmitter as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10. Wiring Diagram for Transient Protection Terminal Block (HART)
Rosemount 5400 Series Radar
Level Transmitter
Field Communicator
Load Resistance 250 W
HART
modem
PC
Power
Supply
55
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.9 FOUNDATION fieldbus
4.9.1 Power requirements
Terminals in the transmitter housing provide connections for signal wiring.
The Rosemount 5400 transmitter is powered over FOUNDATION fieldbus with standard fieldbus
power supplies.
The transmitter operates with the following power supplies:
The Rosemount 5400 Series with FOUNDATION fieldbus operates using a power supply ranging
from 9-32 Vdc (9-30 Vdc in IS applications, 16-32 Vdc in explosion-proof / flameproof
applications, and 9-17.5 Vdc in FISCO, IS applications).
Grounding
Signal wiring of the fieldbus segment cannot be grounded. Grounding out one of the signal
wires will shut down the entire fieldbus segment.
Shield wire ground
To protect the fieldbus segment from noise, grounding techniques for shield wire usually
require a single grounding point for shield wire to avoid creating a ground loop. The ground
point is typically at the power supply.
Approval type Power supply (Vdc)
IS 9 - 30
Explosion-proof/flameproof 16 - 32
None 9 - 32
56
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Connecting fieldbus devices
Figure 4-11. Rosemount 5400 Series Radar Transmitter Field Wiring
Signal
wiring
Power
supply
FOUNDATION
fieldbus
configuration
tool
Terminators
6200 ft (1900 m) max
(depending upon cable characteristics)
Integrated power
conditioner
and filter
(Trunk)
(Spur)
(Spur)
(The power supply,
filter, first terminator,
and configuration tool
are typically located in
the control room.)
fieldbus
segment
fieldbus
devices on
segment
Intrinsically safe installations may
allow fewer devices per IS barrier due
to current limitations.
Configuration with RRM
(in a fieldbus system hooked
up on a fieldbus segment).
57
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.9.2 Non-intrinsically safe power supply
With non-intrinsically safe power supply in Non-hazardous installations or Explo-
sion-proof/Flameproof installations, wire the transmitter as shown in Figure 4-12.
Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitters with Explosion-proof/Flameproof Output have a built-in
barrier; no external barrier needed.
Note
Make sure that the power supply is off when connecting the transmitter.
Figure 4-12. Wiring for Non-Intrinsically Safe Power Supply (FOUNDATION fieldbus)
Note
For explosion-proof/flameproof installations make sure that the transmitter is grounded to the
IS ground terminal inside the terminal compartment in accordance with national and local
electrical codes.
Rosemount 5400 Series
radar transmitter
Field communicator
Fieldbus
modem
PC
Power
supply
58
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.9.3 Intrinsically safe power supply
When your power supply is intrinsically safe, wire the transmitter as shown in Figure 4-13.
Note
Make sure that the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe field
wiring practices.
Installation also needs to comply with the applicable installation/control drawing. See “Approval
drawings” on page 230.
Figure 4-13. Wiring Diagram for Intrinsically Safe Power Supply (FOUNDATION fieldbus)
Rosemount 5400 Series
Radar Transmitter
For IS Parameters, see Appendix B: Product Certifications.
Approved IS Barrier
Field Communicator
Fieldbus
modem
PC
Power
supply
59
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.9.4 Type N approvals: non-sparking / energy-limited power
supply
With a non-sparking / energy-limited power supply, wire the transmitter as shown in
Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14. Wiring Diagram for Non-Sparking / Energy-Limited Power Supply (FOUNDATION fieldbus)
Rosemount 5400 Series
radar level transmitter
FOUNDATION fieldbus: Un = 32 V
Power
supply
PC
Field communicator
Fieldbus
modem
60
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.10 HART to Modbus Converter (HMC)
The Rosemount 5400 Series RS-485 with Modbus communication transmitter version operates
using a power supply ranging from 8-30 Vdc (max. rating). See the Rosemount 5300/5400
Series with HART to Modbus Converter Manual Supplement (Document No. 00809-0500-4530)
for details.
Power consumption:
< 0.5 W (with HART address = 1)
< 1.2 W (incl. four HART slaves)
4.10.1 Connecting the transmitter
1. Disconnect/shut off the electrical power to transmitter head and then open the
instrument cover. Do not remove the cover in an explosive atmosphere with a live
circuit.
2. Pull the cable through the cable gland/conduit. For the RS-485 bus, use shielded
twisted pair wiring, preferably with an impedance of 120 : (typically 24 AWG) in order
to comply with the EIA-485 standard and EMC regulations. The maximum cable length
is 4000 ft (1200 m).
3. Make sure that the transmitter housing is grounded, then connect wires according to
Figure 4-15 and Table 4-2. Connect the lead that originates from the “A” line from the
RS-485 bus to the terminal marked MB, and the lead that originates from the “B” line to
the terminal marked MA.
4. If it is the last transmitter on the bus, connect the 120 : termination resistor.
5. Connect the leads from the positive side of the power supply to the terminal marked
POWER +, and the leads from the negative side of the power supply to the terminal
marked POWER -. The power supply cables must be suitable for the supply voltage and
ambient temperature, and approved for use in hazardous areas, where applicable.
6. Attach and tighten the housing cover. Tighten the cable gland, then plug and seal any
unused terminals, and connect the power supply.
Note
Rosemount 5400 Series transmitters with flameproof/explosion-proof output have a built-in
barrier; no external barrier needed.
61
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Figure 4-15. Field Wiring Connections
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
RS-485 Bus
B
A
Power
supply
HART +
HART -
120W
120W
If it is the last
transmitter on the
bus, connect the 120
W termination
resistor
MODBUS
(RS-485)
v
erter
MB
MA
-
120W
62
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.10.2 Connection terminals
The connection terminals are described in Table 4-2 below:
Table 4-2. Connection Terminals
Figure 4-16. Connection Terminals for Rosemount 5400 with HART to Modbus Converter
Connector label Description Comment
HART + Positive HART connector Connect to PC with RRM software, Field
Communicator, or other HART
configurators.
HART - Negative HART connector
MA Modbus RS-485 B connection
(RX/TX+)(1)
(1) The designation of the connectors does not follow the EIA-485 standard, which states that RX/TX- should be referred to as 'A' and
RX/TX+ as 'B'.
Connect to Remote Terminal Unit
(RTU)
MB Modbus RS-485 A connection
(RX/TX-)(1)
POWER + Positive Power input terminal Apply +8 Vdc to +30 Vdc (max. rating)
POWER - Negative Power input terminal
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
-
-+
+
HART +
HART -
63
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.10.3 RS-485 bus
The Rosemount 5400 transmitter does not provide electrical isolation between the
RS-485 bus and the transmitter power supply
Maintain a bus topology and minimize stub length
Figure 4-17 identifies multidrop wiring topology, where up to 32 devices may be wired
on one RS-485 bus
The RS-485 bus needs to be terminated once at each end, but should not be terminated
elsewhere on the bus
4.10.4 Installation cases
Install the Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitter as shown in Figure 4-17.
Use common ground for Modbus Master and Power Supply
The Power cables and RS-485 Bus are in the same cable installation
A ground cable is installed and shall be used (cable size > 4 mm according to
IEC60079-14, or size according to applicable national regulations and standards). A
properly installed threaded conduit connection may provide sufficient ground.
The cable shielding is grounded at master site (optional)
Note
The HMC equipped transmitter contains intrinsically safe circuits that require the housing to be
grounded in accordance with national and local electrical codes. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Figure 4-17. Multidrop Connection of Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitters
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Power
supply
120 W
120 W RS-485 bus B
A
Modbus
master
Z
External
ground screw
Internal
ground screw External
ground screw
Internal
ground screw
64
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Alternatively, the Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitter can be installed as shown in Figure 4-18.
If this wiring layout is used, there is an increased risk for communication disturbances due to
differences in potential between grounding points. By using the same grounding point for
Modbus Master and Power Supply, this risk is reduced.
Figure 4-18. Alternative Multidrop Connection of Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitters
Star topology
For a star topology connection of the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitters, the transmitter with
the longest cable run needs to be fitted with a 120 : termination resistor.
Figure 4-19. Star Topology Connection of Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitters
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Power
supply
120 W
120 :RS-485 bus B
A
Modbus
master
Z
External
ground screw
External
ground screw
Internal
ground screw
Internal
ground screw
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
MODBUS
(RS-485)
v
erter
MB
MA
-
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
For a star topology
connection, connect
the 120 :
termination resistor
to the transmitter
with the longest
cable run.
65
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.10.5 External HART devices (slaves)
The HMC supports up to four external HART devices. The external devices are separated by
using the HART address. The address must be different between the external devices and only
addresses 1 to 5 are allowed for multiple slaves. Connect the devices one at a time and change
the short address prior to connecting the next device by using a HART Configuration Tool such
as RRM, or a Field Communicator.
Note
The power supply from the HMC to external HART devices is not intrinsically safe. In a hazardous
environment, any external HART device connected to the HMC must have
Flameproof/Explosion-proof certification.
The HMC cyclically polls the HART devices for measurement values. The update rate depends on
the number of connected devices and is shown in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3. Approximate Update Rates for Measurement Values
Figure 4-20. The HMC Module Supports up to Four External Devices (slaves)
No. of devices (slaves) Approx. update rate
12 seconds
23 seconds
34 seconds
45 seconds
55 seconds
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
Power
supply
RS-485
bus
Up to four
external
devices External HART
device 2
External HART
device 1
66
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.11 Establish HART communication
The Rosemount 5400 Series can be configured using the RRM PC software or a Field
Communicator. Configuration is done by sending HART commands through the HMC to the
Rosemount 5400 transmitter electronics. To establish HART communication, connect to the
MA/MB terminals, or to the HART terminals. Both alternatives are described below.
4.11.1 Connect to the MA/MB terminals
The Rosemount 5400 level transmitter can be configured with RRM using the MA, MB terminals.
An RS-485 Converter is required to connect to the transmitter.
The transmitter will try to establish communication using different protocols during 20 second
timeslots from time of startup.
Figure 4-21. RS-485 Communication after Startup
The transmitter will continue to use a communication protocol once communication has been
established.
To configure the Rosemount 5400 level transmitter using RRM and the MA, MB terminals, do
the following:
1. Connect the RS-485 Converter to the MA, MB connectors.
2. Start RRM and open Communication Preferences.
HART
20 seconds
Modbus RTU
20 seconds
Configured
protocol
(Modbus RTU,
Levelmaster,
or Modbus
ASCII)
20 seconds
HART
20 seconds
Time
0 s 20 s 40 s 60 s 80 s 100 s
Configured
protocol
(Modbus RTU,
Levelmaster,
or Modbus
ASCII)
20 seconds
67
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
3. Enable HART communication and make sure the port for the RS-485 Converter is
selected. Use the following settings:
4. Connect the power wires (or cycle power) to the transmitter.
5. Wait 20 seconds and then open the Search Device window in RRM (also see Note on
page 68). Make sure HART address 1 is being scanned.
6. Connect to the transmitter and perform the necessary configuration.
7. After completing the configuration, disconnect the RS-485 Converter, connect the
Modbus communication wires and cycle power to the transmitter
8. Verify that communication between the transmitter and the RTU is established (can
take up to 60 seconds from startup).
68
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
Note
Take the following into consideration if there are multiple Rosemount 5400 Modbus units on the
bus:
By default, the transmitters have HART address 1. It will not be possible to establish
communication on HART address 1 if several transmitters have the same address. In this case,
there are alternative solutions to establish communication:
1. Select the Scan by Tag option in the Search Device window in RRM and enter the HART
Device Tag of the transmitter. Communication can now be established with an
individual transmitter even if several devices have the same HART address.
2. Make sure the Rosemount 5400 transmitter is alone on bus. Disconnect or turn off
power from any other dcevies.
4.11.2 Connect to the HART terminals
To configure the Rosemount 5400 transmitter, connect the communicator or PC to the HART
terminals using a HART modem, see Figure 4-16 on page 62. Both the configuration tool and
the RS-485 bus can be connected simultaneously. Configuration data is sent with HART
commands through the HMC to the Rosemount 5400 transmitter electronics.
Note that the power supply must be connected during configuration, see also “Connecting the
transmitter” on page 47.
Note
Measurement data is not updated to the Modbus Master when a configuration tool is
connected.
69
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.12 Optional devices
4.12.1 Tri-Loop™ HART to analog converter
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter outputs a HART signal with four process variables. The
Model 333 HART Tri-Loop provides up to three additional analog 4-20 mA outputs.
Figure 4-22. Wiring Diagram for HART Tri-Loop
Configure Channels 1, 2, and 3 to reflect the units in addition to Upper Range Values and Lower
Range Values for secondary, tertiary, and fourth variables (variable assignment is configured in
the Rosemount 5400 Series). It is also possible to enable or disable a channel from this menu.
Ch. 3
Ch. 2
Ch. 1
Each Tri-Loop
channel receives
power from
control room
Channel 1 must
be powered for
the Tri-Loop to
operate
Device receives
power from
control room
RL
!
250
:
HART Burst command 3/
analog output
IS barrier
DIN rail mounted
HART Tri-Loop
Control room
Burst input
to Tri-Loop
70
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.12.2 751 Field Signal Indicator
Figure 4-23. Wiring Diagram for a Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitter with a 751 Field
Signal Indicator
Power supply
Rosemount 5400 Series radar transmitter 751 Field Signal
Indicator
71
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
4.12.3 Smart Wireless THUM™ Adapter
The Rosemount 5400 Series can be combined with the Smart Wireless THUM Adapter.
For more information, see the Smart Wireless THUM™ Adapter for Rosemount Process Level
Transmitter Applications Technical Note (Document No. 00840-0100-4026) and the Smart
Wireless THUM™ Adapter Reference Manual (Document No. 00809-0100-4075).
Figure 4-24. Wiring Diagram for a Rosemount 5400 Series with the Smart Wireless THUM
Adapter
Rosemount 5400 Series radar
transmitter with THUM Adapter
Rosemount Field
Communicator
RRM/Rosemount
Configuration Tool
4-20 mA/HART
Smart wireless
gateway
AMS® configurator
DCS/host system
72
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 4: Electrical Installation
November 2014
Electrical Installation
73
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Section 5 Basic Configuration/Start-up
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 73
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 74
Basic configuration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75
Basic configuration using RRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 84
Configuration using a Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 101
Basic configuration using AMS Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 105
Configuration using DeltaV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 106
FOUNDATION fieldbus overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 112
Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 115
Tri-Loop™ HART to Analog Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 117
HART multidrop configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 118
5.1 Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the safety messages listed at the beginning of each
section before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating environment of the gauge is consistent with the appropriate
hazardous locations certifications.
Before connecting a HART®-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure
the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
Do not remove the gauge cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit
is alive.
All connection head covers must be fully engaged to meet explosion-proof
requirements.
Failure to follow safe installation and servicing guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Use the equipment only as specified in this manual. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Do not perform any service other than those contained in this manual unless you are
qualified.
74
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.2 Overview
The configuration of a Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is normally a simple and straightfor-
ward task. If the transmitter is pre-configured at the factory according to ordering specifications
in the Configuration Data Sheet, no further basic configuration is required, unless tank
conditions have changed.
The Rosemount 5400 Series supports a set of advanced configuration options that can be used
to handle special tank conditions and applications. For further information on advanced
configuration options, see Appendix C: Advanced Configuration.
5.2.1 Basic configuration parameters
The basic configuration includes parameters for a standard configuration which is sufficient in
most cases. The basic configuration comprises the following items:
Measurement Units
Tank Configuration
- Tank Geometry
- Environment
- Volume
Analog Output
Echo Tuning: see page 83 for more information on the Amplitude Threshold Curve
(ATC), and “Echo tuning” on page 83 for more information on False Echo Registration
5.2.2 Configuration tools
There are several tools available for basic configuration of a Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter:
RRM. Note that RRM is required for advanced configuration features.
See “Basic configuration using RRM” on page 84 for information on using RRM to
configure the Rosemount 5400 Series.
Rosemount Field Communicator.
See “Configuration using a Field Communicator” on page 101 for the Field
Communicator Menu Tree.
DTM (compliant with version 1.2 of the FDT®/DTM™ specification) is also available
supporting configuration in, for instance, Yokogawa Fieldmate/PRM, E+HTM FieldCare,
and PACTwareTM
AMS® Suite software (for HART).
See “Basic configuration using AMS Suite” on page 105 for information on configuring
AMS Suite.
DeltaVTM (only for FOUNDATION™ fieldbus).
See “Configuration using DeltaV” on page 106 for information on configuring the
Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter using DeltaV.
Other tools that support EDDL functionality.
RRM is a user-friendly, Windows™ based software package that includes waveform plots,
offline/online configuration Wizard, logging, and extensive online help.
75
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
To communicate with the transmitter using RRM, a HART modem (part number
03300-7004-0001 or 03300-7004-0002) or a FOUNDATION fieldbus modem (part number
03095-5108-0001 for PCMCIA) is required. For FOUNDATION fieldbus communication you will
also need the National Instruments Communication Manager software (see “Installing the RRM
software for FOUNDATION fieldbus” on page 88).
5.3 Basic configuration parameters
This chapter describes the basic parameters that need to be configured for a Rosemount 5400
transmitter. If the transmitter is factory-configured according to the ordering specifications in
the Configuration Data Sheet, no further basic configuration is needed unless conditions have
changed since the ordering date.
Different configuration tools are described at the end of this section.
5.3.1 Measurement units
Measurement units can be specified for presentation of Level, Level Rate, Volume and
Temperature values.
5.3.2 Tank geometry
Tank height
The Tank Height is the distance between the Upper Reference Point, at the underside of the
transmitter flange or the threaded adapter, and the Lower Reference Point, close to or at the
bottom of the tank (see Figure 5-2 for further information on Upper Reference Points for
various tank connections). The transmitter measures the distance to the product surface and
subtracts this value from the Tank Height to determine the product level.
Figure 5-1. Tank Geometry
Tank height (R)
Product level
Upper reference point
Lower reference point
(Level = 0)
Transition zone
76
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Figure 5-2. Upper Reference Point
Tank type and tank bottom type
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is optimized according to the Tank Type and Tan k
Bottom Type configuration by automatically setting some parameters to predefined default
values.
Select Tank Bottom Type Flat Inclined if the bottom inclination is between 10 and 30 degrees. If
the inclination is less than 10 degrees, but there are disturbing objects on the tank floor (like
heating coils) within the radar beam, this selection should also be used. If the inclination is
greater than 30 degrees, use the Cone Tank Bottom Type.
Table 5-1. Tank Type and Tank Bottom Type
Figure 5-3. Transmitter Optimization for Different Tank Types and Bottom Shapes
Tank type Tank bottom type
Vertical cylinder Flat, dome, cone, flat inclined/obstructed
Horizontal cylinder Not used
Spherical Not used
Cubical Flat, dome, cone, flat inclined/obstructed
Cone antenna
Rod antenna
with flange
Rod antenna with
threaded tank
connection
Upper reference point
Adapter Flange
Process seal
antenna
Flat Dome ConeFlat inclined Spherical
77
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Pipe diameter
When the transmitter is mounted in a still-pipe, the inner diameter of the pipe must be
specified. The pipe diameter is used to compensate for the lower microwave propagation speed
inside the pipe. An incorrect value gives a scale factor error. If locally supplied still-pipes are
used, make sure the inner diameter is noted before the pipe is installed.
Transition zone
The measurement accuracy is reduced within the transition zone region 6 in. (150 mm) from
the lower end of the antenna. It is recommended that the Upper Range Value (20 mA) be set
outside the transition zone.
5.3.3 Process conditions
Describe the conditions of the tank according to the tank environment parameters for process
conditions listed below. For best performance, choose only if applicable, and no more than
two options.
Rapid level changes
Optimize the transmitter for measurement conditions where the level changes quickly from the
filling and emptying of the tank. As a default standard, a Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is
able to track level changes of up to 1.5 in./s (40 mm/s). When the Rapid Level Changes
check-box is selected, the transmitter can track level changes of up to 8 in./s (200 mm/s).
Turbulent surface
This parameter should be used if the tank has a turbulent surface. The reason for the turbulence
might be splash loading, agitators, mixers, or boiling product. Normally, the waves in a tank are
quite small and cause local rapid level changes. By setting this parameter, the performance of
the transmitter will improve when there are small and quickly changing amplitudes and levels.
Foam
Setting this parameter optimizes the gauge for conditions with weak and varying surface echo
amplitudes, such as foam. When the foam is light and airy, the actual product level is measured.
For heavy and dense foam, the transmitter measures the level of the foam’s upper surface.
Product dielectric range
The Dielectric Constant is related to the reflectivity of the product. By setting this parameter,
measurement performance can be optimized. However, the transmitter will still be able to
perform properly, even if the actual Dielectric Constant differs from the configured value.
Solid product
Setting this parameter optimizes the device for solid products, for example concrete or grains.
For instance, this parameter can be used when the application is a silo with product pile-up. The
transmitter will be optimized for weak echoes and a sloping surface which is typical when
measuring at solid materials. This option shall only be used for a Rosemount 5402 with a 4” cone
antenna.
78
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.3.4 Volume configuration
For volume calculations, choose one of the standard tank shapes or the strapping option. Select
None if volume calculation is not used. For the standard tanks, a Volume Offset parameter can
be specified which can be used for a non-zero volume that corresponds to the zero level. This
may be useful, for example, if the user wants to include the product volume below the zero level.
Volume calculation is performed by using a predefined tank shape or a strapping table. One of
the following standard tank shapes can be chosen:
Sphere
Vertical cylinder
Horizontal cylinder
Vertical bullet
Horizontal bullet
The following parameters must be entered for a standard tank shape:
Tank diameter
Tank height (not for spherical tanks)
Volume offset
79
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Standard tank shapes
Figure 5-4. Standard Tank Shapes
Vertical cylinder
Vertical cylinder tanks are specified by
diameter, height, and volume offset.
Horizontal cylinder
Horizontal cylinder tanks are specified by
diameter, height, and volume offset.
Vertical bullet
Vertical bullet tanks are specified by
diameter, height, and volume offset. The
volume calculation model for this tank
shape estimates that the radius of the
bullet end is equal to the diameter/2.
Horizontal bullet
Horizontal bullet tanks are specified by
diameter, height, and volume offset. The
volume calculation model for this tank
shape estimates that the radius of the
bullet end is equal to the diameter/2.
Sphere
Spherical tanks are specified by diameter
and volume offset.
Diameter Height
Diameter
Height
Diameter Height
Diameter
Height
Diameter
80
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Strapping table
The Strapping Table option is used when the tank shape deviates significantly from an ideal
sphere or cylinder, or when high volume accuracy is required.
The Strapping Table divides the tank into segments. Level values and corresponding volumes
are entered at the bottom of the tank. These figures can typically be obtained from tank
drawings or from a certificate provided by the tank manufacturer. A maximum of 20 strapping
points can be entered. For each level value the corresponding total volume up to the specified
level is entered.
The volume value is interpolated if the product surface is between two level values in the table.
Figure 5-5. Strapping Points
Actual tank bottom may look like this.
Using only 3 strapping points results in a level-to-volume profile
that is more angular than the actual shape.
Using 10-15 of the points at the bottom of the tank yields a
level-to-volume profile that is similar to the actual tank bottom.
81
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.3.5 Analog output (HART)
For the analog output, the output source (primary value), range values, and alarm mode are
specified.
Figure 5-6. Standard Range Value Settings
Output source/primary variable
Specify the source to control the analog output. Typically, the Primary Value is configured to be
the Product Level.
Upper/lower range value
Enter the range values that correspond to the analog output values 4 and 20 mA. The 20 mA
point should be set below the Transition Zone, since the measurement accuracy is reduced in
this region. For information on the Transition Zone, see “Performance specifications” on
page 189.
If a measured value goes beyond the measurement range, the transmitter enters saturation
mode (if limit alarm is disabled) or alarm mode, depending on the current configuration.
Alarm mode
Choose the desired Alarm mode to specify the analog output state when there is a failure or a
measurement error.
High: the output current is set to the High Alarm Limit.
Low: the output current is set to the Low Alarm Limit.
20 mA Upper Range Value (URV)
Product level
4 mA Lower Range Value (LRV)
Range 0-100 %
Lower reference point
(Level=0)
Upper reference point
Transition zone
82
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Freeze Current: the output current is set to the last valid value at the time when the error
occurs.
Default settings for alarm mode:
Measurement errors: Output current = High
Measured value out of range: transmitter enters saturation mode (if Limit Alarm is
disabled)
Table 5-2. Analog Output: Standard Alarm Value vs. Saturation Value
In saturation mode, if the primary variable is not in low alarm mode, the minimum output is 3.9
mA. If the primary variable is not in high alarm mode, the maximum output is 20.8 mA.
Table 5-3. Analog Output: NAMUR-compliant Alarm Value vs. Saturation Value
5.3.6 Level and distance calibration
Level and distance calibration may be necessary when using a nozzle or pipe or if there are
disturbances in the near zone caused by a physical object.
Non-metallic (e.g. plastic) vessels and installation geometry may introduce an offset for the zero
reference point. This offset may be up to ± 25 mm. The offset can be compensated for using
Distance Calibration.
When calibrating the transmitter, it is important that the product surface is calm and that the
tank is not being filled or emptied.
A complete calibration is performed in two steps:
1. Calibrate the distance measurement by adjusting the Calibration Offset parameter.
2. Calibrate the level measurement by adjusting the Tank Height.
Level 4–20 mA saturation value 4–20 mA alarm value
Low 3.9 mA 3.75 mA
High 20.8 mA 21.75 mA
Level 4–20 mA saturation value 4–20 mA alarm value
High 20.5 mA 22.5 mA
83
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Distance calibration
1. Measure the actual distance between the Upper Reference Point and the product
surface.
2. Adjust the Calibration Distance so that the Distance measured by the transmitter
corresponds to the actual distance.
The Calibration Distance parameter is available via
HART command [2, 3, 2, 4, 1],
or
RRM:
a. Select the Tank icon under Device Config/Setup in the RRM workspace.
b. In the Tank window, select the Geometry tab.
c. Select the Advanced button.
d. Enter the desired value in the Calibration Distance field and select the Store button.
Level calibration
1. Measure the actual Product Level.
2. Adjust the Tank Height so the product level measured by the transmitter corresponds
to the actual product level.
Figure 5-7. Distance and Level Calibration
5.3.7 Echo tuning
When Basic Configuration is performed, the transmitter may need to be tuned to handle
disturbing objects in the tank. There are different methods available for handling disturbance
echoes with the Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitter:
ATC
False echo registration, see “Registration of false echoes” on page 135
The Guided Setup in the RRM configuration program includes a Measure and Learn function which
automatically registers false echoes and creates an ATC (see “Guided setup” on page 92).
The created ATC is based on the present tank spectra and process condition settings.
Disturbances below the product surface might not be handled by the Measure and Learn
function.
Reference point
Distance
Reference point
Tank height
Level
84
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.3.8 ATC
Setting up an ATC makes tracking of the product surface more robust in the presence of noise
and weak disturbing echoes. The ATC is normally used for filtering out disturbances with an
amplitude smaller than the amplitude of the product surface echo.
The ATC is designed as a number of individually adjustable amplitude threshold points.
Figure 5-8. Weak Disturbing Echoes can be Filtered Out by Creating an Amplitude
Threshold
To create an ATC, the Measure and Learn function is available in the RRM program.
5.4 Basic configuration using RRM
The RRM is a user-friendly software tool that allows configuration of the Rosemount 5400
transmitter. Choose either of the following methods to configure a Rosemount 5400
transmitter with RRM:
Guided Setup, if you are unfamiliar with the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter (see
page 92)
Setup functions, if you are already familiar with the configuration process, or for
changes to the current settings (see page 100)
5.4.1 System requirements
Hardware
COM Port: 1 serial COM port or 1 USB port
Graphical Card (minimum/recommended): screen resolution 800 x 600/1024 x 768.
Hard drive space: 100 MB
ATC
Measurement signal
Amplitude, mV
Distance, m
85
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Software
Operating Systems supported:
Windows XP
Windows 7
5.4.2 Help in RRM
From the Help menu, select the Contents option to access help information. Help is also
available from a Help button in most windows.
5.4.3 Installing the RRM software for HART communication
To install the RRM:
1. Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive.
2. If the installation program is not started automatically, select Run from the Windows
Start bar.
3. Enter D:\RRM\Setup.exe where D is the CD-ROM drive.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen.
5. Make sure that HART is chosen as default protocol.
6. Set COM Port Buffers to 1, see page 88.
86
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Getting started
1. From the Start menu, select Programs > Rosemount > Rosemount Radar Master or
select the RRM icon in the Windows workspace.
2. If the Search Device window did not appear automatically, select menu option Device >
Search.
3. In the Search Device window, select communication protocol HART and select the Start
Scan button (select the Advanced button to specify start and stop address).
Now RRM searches for the transmitter.
4. The Search Device window presents a list of found transmitters.
5. Select the desired transmitter and press OK to connect. If communication does not
work, check that the correct COM port is configured correctly and is connected to the
computer. See “Specifying the COM port” on page 87. Verify from the Communication
Preferences window that HART communication is enabled.
6. The RRM Status Bar can be used to verify that RRM is communicating with the
transmitter:
RRM communicates
with the transmitter
No communication
with the transmitter
87
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.4.4 Specifying the COM port
If communication is not established, open the Communication Preferences window and check
that the correct COM Port is selected:
1. From the View menu, select Communication Preferences in RRM.
Figure 5-9. Communication Settings
2. Make sure that HART communication is enabled.
3. Check which COM port is connected to the modem.
4. Select the COM port option matching the actual COM port on the PC that is connected
to the transmitter.
88
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.4.5 To set the COM port buffers
The COM port Receive Buffer and Transmit Buffer need to be set to 1 by doing the following:
1. In the Microsoft® Windows Control Panel, open the System option.
2. Select the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button.
3. Expand the Ports node in the tree view.
4. Click the right mouse button on the selected COM port and then select Properties.
5. Select the Port Settings tab and click the Advanced button.
6. Drag the Receive Buffer and Transmit Buffer slides to 1.
7. Click the OK button.
8. Reboot the computer.
5.4.6 Specifying measurement units
Measurement units for data presentation in RRM can be specified when the RRM program is
installed. Units can also be changed as follows:
1. Select the Application Preferences option from the View menu.
2. Select the Measurement Units tab.
3. Select the desired units for Length, Level Rate, Volume, and Temperature.
5.4.7 Installing the RRM software for FOUNDATION fieldbus
To install the RRM for FOUNDATION fieldbus communication:
1. Start by installing the National Instruments Communication Manager software. See
National Instruments manual (Getting started with your PCMCIA-FBUS and the NI-FBUS™
software) for more information.
2. Insert the RRM installation CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. If the installation program is not automatically started, select Run from the Windows
Start bar.
4. Type D:\RRM\Setup.exe where D is the CD-ROM drive.
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
6. Make sure that FOUNDATION fieldbus is selected as default protocol.
89
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Getting started
1. Before starting RRM make sure that appropriate settings are made with the National
Instruments Interface Configuration Utility:
Use the following settings:
Device address = Visitor
Device Type = Link Master Device
Usage = NI-FBUS
2. Start RRM: from the Start menu click Programs > Rosemount > Rosemount
RadarMaster or click the RRM icon in the Microsoft Windows workspace.
3. If the National Instruments Communication Manager server is not running, click Yes when
RRM displays a request for starting the server.
4. If the Search Device window did not appear automatically, select menu option Device >
Search.
5. In the Search Device window, select communication protocol FOUNDATION fieldbus (if
not already selected) and click the Start Scan button (click the Advanced button if you
want to specify start and stop dress).
Now RRM searches for the transmitter. After a while, RRM shows the transmitters found
on the bus:
90
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
6. Select the desired transmitter and click OK to connect.
In the RRM Status Bar, verify that RRM communicates with the transmitter:
5.4.8 Specifying measurement units
Measurement units for data presentation in RRM can be specified when the RRM program is
installed. Units can also be changed as follows:
1. From the View menu, select the Application Preferences option.
2. Select the Measurement Units tab.
3. Select the desired units for Length, Level Rate, Volume, and Temperature.
RRM communicates
with the transmitter
No communication
with the transmitter
91
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.4.9 Using the Setup functions
Use the Setup function if you are already familiar with the configuration process for the
Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter or for changes to the current settings:
Figure 5-10. Setup Functions in RRM
1. Start the RRM software.
2. In the RRM workspace, select the
appropriate icon for the configuration
of transmitter parameters:
Wizard: the Wizard is a tool that
guides you through the basic
configuration procedure of a
Rosemount 5400 Series
transmitter
General: configuration of general
settings, such as measurement
units and communication
parameters. This window also lets
you configure which LCD
variables to be displayed.
Tank: configuration of Tank
Geometry, Tank Environment,
and Volume
Echo Curve: disturbance echo
handling
Advanced: advanced
configuration
General
Echo Curve
Advanced
Wizard
Tank geometr y,
Environment,
Volume
92
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.4.10 Guided setup
The following description tells how to use the RRM Guided Setup. The corresponding HART
commands (Field Communicator Fast Key Sequence) are also shown. The Guided Setup is useful
for those unfamiliar with the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter.
Guided Setup and Configuration Wizard
1. Start the RRM program. RRM automatically
presents a list of available transmitters. Select
the desired transmitter. The transmitter is now
connected and the Guided Setup window
appears.
2. In the Guided Setup window, select the Run
Wizard... button and follow the instructions
through a short transmitter installation
procedure.
Device Properties
3. The first window in the Configuration Wizard
presents general information that is stored in the
transmitter database, such as device model,
serial number, antenna type, communication
protocol, and device address.
Verify that the information matches the ordering
information.
Run Wizard
Note
The Guided Setup is an extended installation
guide including more than just the
configuration Wizard. It can be disabled by
de-selecting the Open Guided Setup dialog
after Connect check-box in the Application
Preferences window (menu option View >
Application Preferences).
93
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Device Information
4. The Tag, Message, Descriptor, and Date
information is entered in this window. This
information is not required for the operation of
the transmitter and may be left out, if desired.
HART command: [2, 2, 1].
Digital Units
5. The Length Unit, Level Rate Unit, Volume Unit, and
Temperature Unit information is entered in this
window.
94
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Tank Geometry
6. Select the Tank Type corresponding to the actual
tank. If none of the available options matches
the tank, select Unknown.
HART command: [2, 1, 2, 1].
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > GEOM_TANK_TYPE.
Tank Bottom Type is important for the
measurement performance close to the tank
bottom.
HART command: [2, 1, 2, 2].
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 >
GEOM_TANK_BOTTOM_TYPE.
Tank Height is the distance from the Upper
Reference Point to the Lower Reference Point
(see “Tank geometry” on page 75). This number
needs to be as accurate as possible.
HART command: [2, 1, 2, 3].
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > GEOM_TANK_HEIGHT.
Select the Enable Still-Pipe/Bridle
Measurement check-box and enter the Pipe
Inner Diameter if the transmitter is mounted on a
Still-Pipe.
HART command: [2, 1, 2, 4] / [2, 1, 2, 5].
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100>
SIGNAL_PROC_CONFIG (Enable),
ANTENNA_PIPE_DIAM.
For more information, see “Tank geometry” on
page 75.
Enable Still
Pipe/Bridle
Measurement
95
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Tank Environment
7. In the Process Condition box, select the
check-boxes that correspond to the conditions
of the tank. Select as few options as possible and
no more than two. See “Process conditions” on
page 77 for more information.
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > ENV_ENVIRONMENT.
The Dielectric Chart lists the dielectric constants
of a large number of products and can be
opened by selecting View > Dielectric Constant
Chart menu option.
Select the Product Dielectric Range that
corresponds to the current product. If the
correct range value for this parameter is
unknown, or the contents in the tank are
continually changing, choose Unknown.
HART command: [2, 1, 3, 2].
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > ENV_DIELECTR_CONST.
Volume
8. For volume calculation, select a pre-defined
calculation method based on a tank shape that
corresponds to the actual tank. Select None if
volume calculation is not needed.
The Strapping Table option is used if the actual
tank does not match any of the available options
for pre-defined tanks or if higher calculation
accuracy is desired.
HART command: [2, 1, 4, 1].
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameters:
ADV_CONFIG_TB_1300 >
VOL_VOLUME_CALC_METHOD/
VOL_IDEAL_DIAMETER/
VOL_IDEAL_LENGTH/
VOL_VOLUME_OFFSET.
For more information, see “Volume
configuration” on page 78.
96
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Analog output
9. Typically, the Primary Variable (PV) is
configured to be Product Level or Volume.
Set the analog output range by inputting the
Lower Range Value (4 mA) and the Upper
Range Value (20 mA) to the desired values.
The Alarm Mode specifies the output state
when a measurement error occurs.
HART command: [2, 1, 5].
See “Analog output (HART)” on page 81 for
more information on Analog Output
configuration and Alarm Mode settings.
Finish Configuration Wizard
10. This is the last window in the Configuration
Wizard. The configuration can be changed at any
time by using the Setup windows (General, Tank,
Output etc., see “Using the Setup functions” on
page 100), which contain further options not
available in the configuration wizard.
Select the Finish button and continue with the
next step in the Guided Setup.
Echo tuning
11. Step 2 in the Guided Setup allows automatic
configuration of the ATC and registration of false
echoes by running the Measure and Learn
function. See “Echo tuning” on page 83 for more
information on amplitude thresholds and false
echoes.
Click button 2 to start the Measure and Learn
function.
(If Echo Tuning is not needed, or is done at a later
stage, go on to step 3 in the Guided Setup).
97
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Measure and Learn function
12. Select the Yes button to run the Measure and
Learn function. If No is selected, this function
can be run at a later stage using the Spectrum
Analyzer in RRM.
Make sure there is no filling or emptying
occurring when the Measure and Learn function
is used.
Tank precondition settings
13. The Measure and Learn function creates an ATC
automatically and suggests False Echo Areas.
See “Echo tuning” on page 83.
(By selecting the Advanced button, one or both
of the options can be selected in the
corresponding check-box).
Verify the Tank Precondition settings. Verify that
the Distance to Surface value is correct. If not, it
may be due to a disturbing object in the tank).
Select Empty Tank if the tank is empty.
Spectrum plot
14. The automatically created ATC and False Echo
Areas are shown in the Spectrum Plot. False Echo
Areas are presented as shaded areas, and
represent tank levels where RRM found
interfering echoes to be blocked out. False Echo
Areas can be moved or removed before storing
to the transmitter database. Verify that each
False Echo Area is identified as an object in the
tank that gives rise to a disturbing echo. See
“Echo tuning” on page 83 for more information.
Select the Store button to save the ATC and the
registered disturbance echoes.
98
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Restart the transmitter
15. Restart the transmitter to activate all of the
configuration changes. It may take up to 60
seconds after the restart button is pressed
before measurement values are updated.
Verify Level
16. Run the Verify Level tool to match the product
level reported by the device to a reference
measurement (measured by using for example
hand gauging). In any difference, the Calibration
Distance parameter will be adjusted.
A minor adjustment using Calibration Distance is
normal. There may, for example be a deviation
between the actual tank height and the
configured value.
Configuration backup
17. When configuration is complete, the
configuration should be saved to a backup file.
This information is useful for:
installing another Rosemount 5400 Series
transmitter in a similar tank, since the file
can be directly uploaded to a new device.
restoring the configuration, if configuration
data is lost or accidentally modified, making
the device inoperable.
Use Archive Device to create a backup file and
save additional information, such as an echo
curve movie, for future reference to a .zip
file.
99
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Guided Setup complete
18. The Guided Setup is now complete. To exit the
Guided Setup, select the Close button.
100
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.4.11 Using the Setup functions
Use the Setup function if you are already familiar with the configuration process for the
Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter or to change the current settings:
Figure 5-11. Setup Functions in RRM
1. Start the RRM software.
2. In the RRM workspace, choose the
appropriate icon for configuring
transmitter parameters:
Guided Setup: this dialog guides
you through the most important
steps to perform a successful
configuration of the device. The
guide consists of a few steps.
Wizard: guides the user through
the basic configuration
procedure of the Rosemount
5400 transmitter
General: configures general
settings, such as measurement
units and communication
parameters, and which LCD
variables to display
Tank: configures tank geometry,
tank environment, and volume
Output: configures Analog
Output
Echo Curve: disturbance echo
handling
Advanced: advanced
configuration
General
Echo Curve
Advanced
Wizard
Analog Output
Tank geometr y,
Environment,
Volume
Guided Setup
101
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.5 Configuration using a Field Communicator
This section describes the configuration of a Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter with a Field
Communicator.
The menu tree with the various configuration parameters is shown in Figure 5-14 on page 103.
Section “Basic configuration parameters” on page 75 describes the basic configuration
parameters. See sections “Echo tuning” on page 83 and Appendix C: Advanced Configuration
for information on disturbance echo handling and advanced configuration.
For information on all capabilities, refer to the Field Communicator Product Manual (Document
No. 00809-0100-4276).
Figure 5-12. 375 Field Communicator
Figure 5-13. 475 Field Communicator
E
A
G
D
B
C
F
A. Navigation keys
B. Tab key
C. On/Off key
D. Enter key
E. Function key
F. Alpha numeric keypad
G. Backlight adjustment key
B
C
E
F
G
D
A
A. Power key
B. Navigation key
C. Tab key
D. Backlight key
E. Enter key
F. Function key
G. Alphanumeric keypad
102
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
To make a basic setup of the transmitter, do the following:
1. Check that the desired Measurement Units are selected. HART command: [2, 1, 1, 5].
2. Enter configuration parameters for the following:
Device info. HART command: [2, 2, 1]
Geometry. HART command: [2, 1, 2]
Environment. HART command: [2, 1, 3]
Volume. HART command: [2, 1, 4]
Analog Out. HART command: [2, 1, 5]
3. Run Measure and Learn. HART command: [2, 1, 6, 2]. This function creates an ATC.
4. Restart the transmitter. HART command: [2, 1, 6, 4].
To view the Echo Curve and adjust threshold settings, see “Using the Echo Curve Analyzer” on
page 137.
103
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Figure 5-14. Field Communicator Menu Tree Corresponding to Device Revision 3
Process variables
1Process Variables
2Setup
3 Diagnostics
4 Level
5Analog Out
6Distance
7 Signal Strength
1Primary Variable
22nd
33rd
44th
5All variables
6 Identification
1Basic Setup
2Device
3Tank
4Analog output
5Echo Curve
6Advanced
7Calibration
1Diagnostics
2 Tools
1 Variable Mapping
2Geometry
3Environment
4Volume
5Analog Out
6Finish
1 Identification
2 Variable Mapping
3LCD
4 Communication
5 Alarm/Sat. Limits
1Geometry
2Environment
3Volume
4 Antenna
1Analog Out
2Alarm/Sat. Limits
1 Echo Peaks
2Echo Curve
1Empty Tank
2 Echo Tracking
3 Double Bounce
4 Bottom Projection
5Double Surface
6 Filter Settings
7 Full Tank
1Analog Output
Setup
Diagnostics
1Primary Variable
22nd
33rd
44th
5HART Digital Units
6Damping Value
7Device Status
1 Tank Type
2 Tank Bottom Type
3 Tank Height
4 Still-pipe/Bridle Meas
5Drawing
1 Process Condition
2Product Dielectric
Range
1 Volume Calculation
Method
2Drawing
1Primary Variable
2Range Values
3Alarm Mode
4Sensor Limit
5Alarm Mode
Definition
2Measure and Learn
4Restart Device
1 Found Echo Peaks
2Measurement Output
3Register False Echoes
4 Add False Echo
5Remove False Echo
1 Measure and Learn
2Set Threshold
3Echo Curve
104
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Table 5-4. HART Fast Key Sequences
Function HART Fast Key
Alarm mode 2, 1, 5, 3
Antenna type 2, 3, 4
Device information 2, 2, 1
LCD language 2, 2, 3
LCD variables 2, 2, 3
Length unit 2, 1, 1, 5
Lower Range Value (LRV) (4 mA) 2, 1, 5, 2
Pipe diameter 2, 1, 2, 4
Primary variable 2, 1, 1, 1
Product dielectric constant 2, 1, 3, 2
Range Values (LRV/URV) 2, 1, 5, 2
Tag 2, 2, 1
Tank bottom type 2, 1, 2, 2
Tank height 2, 1, 2, 3
Tank type 2, 1, 2, 1
Temperature unit 2, 1, 1, 5
Hold off distance/upper null zone 2, 3, 4
Upper Range Value (URV) (20 mA) 2, 1, 5, 2
Volume configuration 2, 1, 4, 1
Volume unit 2, 1, 1, 5
105
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.7 Basic configuration using AMS Suite
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter can be configured using the AMS Suite software:
1. Start the AMS Device Manager making sure the
transmitter is connected. The transmitter is
displayed in the Device Connection View window
(pictures correspond to AMS
version 9.0).
2. In the Device Connection View, right click the
transmitter icon.
3. Select the Configure option.
4. Select the Guided Setup option.
5. Configure the transmitter by selecting the
appropriate buttons. For information on the
various configuration parameters, see “Basic
configuration parameters” on page 75 .
106
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.8 Configuration using DeltaV
The following description shows how to configure a Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter using
DeltaV with the AMS application. The corresponding FOUNDATION fieldbus parameters are also
shown. The Rosemount 5400 Series supports DD Methods for DeltaV in order to facilitate
transmitter configuration.
1. Select DeltaV > Engineering > DeltaV Explorer from the Start menu.
2. Navigate through the file structure to find the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter.
3. The Fieldbus Device Properties window lets you enter Device Tag and Description. This
information is not required for the operation of the transmitter and can be left out if
desired.
General information, such as device type (5400), manufacturer, device ID are presented.
The Rosemount 5400 Series device ID consists of the following components:
Manufacturer ID-Model-Serial Number.
Example: 0011515400-EPM-0x81365801.
Check that the information complies with the ordering information.
4. Select the desired transmitter in the DeltaV Explorer and choose the Configure option.
107
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5. Select the Level Measurement setup button.
6. Choose the Tank Type which corresponds to the actual tank. If none of the available
options matches the actual tank, choose Unknown.
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > GEOM_TANK_TYPE.
7. Tank Bottom Type is important for the measurement performance close to the tank
bottom.
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > GEOM_TANK_BOTTOM_TYPE.
8. Tank Height is the distance from the Upper Reference Point to the tank bottom (see “Tank
geometry” on page 75). Make sure that this number is as accurate as possible.
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > GEOM_TANK_HEIGHT.
9. If the transmitter is mounted in a Still Pipe or Bridle, select the Enable Still Pipe Measurement
check box and enter the Pipe Diameter.
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > SIGN_PROC_CONFIG/Pipe Measurement Enable,
TRANSDUCER_1100 > ANTENNA_PIPE_DIAM.
See “Tank geometry” on page 75 for more information.
108
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
10. Select the Environment tab.
11. In the Process Conditions box select the check-boxes that correspond to the conditions in
your tank. You should select as few options as possible and not more than two. See
“Process conditions” on page 77 for more information.
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > ENV_ENVIRONMENT.
Choose the Product Dielectric Constant that corresponds to the current product. If you
are uncertain about the correct range value for this parameter, or if the content in the tank
is changing on a regular basis, choose Unknown.
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > ENV_DIELECTR_CONST.
109
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
12. To configure volume calculation, select the ADV_CONFIG_TB_1300 block and choose the
Volume tab.
110
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
13. Choose a pre-defined calculation method based on a tank shape that corresponds to the
actual tank.
A. Choose None if volume calculation is not desired.
B. Use Volume Offset if you do not want zero volume and zero level to match
(for example, if you want to include the product volume below the zero level).
The Strapping Table option is used if the actual tank does not match any of the available
options for pre-defined tanks or if a higher calculation accuracy is desired.
Calculation Method:
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
ADV_CONFIG_TB_1300 > VOL_VOLUME_CALC_METHOD.
Diameter:
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
ADV_CONFIG_TB_1300 > VOL_IDEAL_DIAMETER.
Tank Length:
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
ADV_CONFIG_TB_1300 > VOL_IDEAL_LENGTH.
Volume Offset:
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
ADV_CONFIG_TB_1300 > VOL_VOLUME_OFFSET.
See “Volume configuration” on page 78 for more information.
14. Choose Measure and Learn to configure the thresholds. For more information on the
Measure and Learn function, see “Echo tuning” on page 83.
15. Restart the device.
111
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.8.1 Advanced configuration
False echo registration
1. In the AMS/DeltaV Explorer select the desired transmitter icon, click the right mouse
button and choose the Configure option.
2. Select Manual Setup and choose the Echo Tuning tab.
3. Click the Register False Echo button and follow the wizard to choose and register
echoes which can be identified as disturbing objects in the tank. See “Registration of
false echoes” on page 135 for more information.
4. To unregister false echoes, click the Unregister False Echo button and follow the
wizard.
112
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.9 FOUNDATION fieldbus overview
The configuration of a Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is normally a simple and straightfor-
ward task. If the transmitter is pre-configured at the factory according to the ordering
specifications in the Configuration Data Sheet, no further Basic Configuration is required unless
tank conditions have changed. The Rosemount 5400 Series supports a set of advanced
configuration options as well, which can be used to handle special tank conditions and
applications.
Figure 5-15 illustrates how the signals are channeled through the gauge.
Figure 5-15. Function Block Diagram for the Rosemount 5400 Series Radar Level
Transmitters with FOUNDATION fieldbus
Each FOUNDATION fieldbus configuration tool or host device has a different way of displaying and
performing configurations. Some will use Device Descriptions (DD) and DD Methods to make
configuration and displaying of data consistent across host platforms. Since there is no
requirement that a configuration tool or host support these features, this section will describe
how to reconfigure the device manually.
This section covers basic operation, software functionality, and basic configuration procedures
for the Rosemount 5400 Series Level Transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus (Device Revision 3).
For detailed information about FOUNDATION fieldbus technology and function blocks used in the
Rosemount 5400 Series, refer to the FOUNDATION fieldbus Blocks Manual
(Document No. 00809-0100-4783).
It is highly recommended that you limit the number of periodic writes to all static or
non-volatile parameters, such as HI_HI_LIM, LOW_CUT, SP, TRACK_IN_D, OUT, IO_OPTS,
BIAS, STATUS_OPTS, SP_HI_LIM, and so on. Static parameter writes increment the static
revision counter, ST_REV, and are written to the device's non-volatile memory. Fieldbus
devices have a non-volatile memory write limit. If a static or non-volatile parameter is
configured to be written periodically, the device can stop its normal operation after it
reaches its limit or fail to accept new values.
FOUNDATION
fieldbus
compliant
communications
stack
Level
transducer
block
Register
transducer
block
Resource block
physical device
information
Advanced
configuration
block
113
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.9.1 Assigning device tag and node address
A Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is shipped with a blank tag and a temporary address
(unless specifically ordered with both) to allow a host to automatically assign an address and a
tag. If the tag or address need to be changed, use the features of the configuration tool. The tool
basically does the following:
1. Changes the address to a temporary address (248-251).
2. Changes the tag to a new value.
3. Changes the address to a new address.
When the transmitter is at a temporary address, only the tag and address can be changed or
written to. The resource, transducer, and function blocks are all disabled.
5.9.2 FOUNDATION fieldbus block operation
Function blocks within the fieldbus device perform the various functions required for process
control. Function blocks perform process control functions, such as Analog Input (AI) functions,
as well as Proportional/Integral/Derivative (PID) functions. The standard function blocks provide
a common structure for defining function block inputs, outputs, control parameters, events,
alarms, and modes, and combining them into a process that can be implemented within a single
device or over the fieldbus network. This simplifies the identification of characteristics that are
common to function blocks.
In addition to function blocks, fieldbus devices contain two other block types to support the
function blocks. These are the Resource block and the Transducer block.
Resource blocks contain the hardware-specific characteristics associated with a device; they
have no input or output parameters. The algorithm within a resource block monitors and
controls the general operation of the physical device hardware. There is only one resource block
defined for a device.
Transducer blocks connect function blocks to local input/output functions. They read sensor
hardware and write to effector (actuator) hardware.
Level transducer block
The Level Transducer block contains transmitter information including diagnostics and the
ability to configure, set to factory defaults and restarting the transmitter.
Register transducer block
The Register Transducer block allows a service engineer to access all database registers in the
device.
Advanced configuration transducer block
The advanced configuration transducer block contains functions such as amplitude threshold
settings for filtering of disturbing echoes and noise, simulation of measurement values and
strapping table for volume measurements.
114
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
Resource block
There are no linkable inputs or outputs to the Resource block.
Analog-Input Block
Figure 5-16. Analog-Input Block
The AI function block processes field device measurements and makes them available to other
function blocks. The output value from the AI block is in engineering units and contains a status
indicating the quality of the measurement. The measuring device may have several
measurements or derived values available in different channels. Use the channel number to
define the variable that the AI block processes and passes on to linked blocks. For further
information refer to Appendix C: Analog-Input Block.
For more information on the different function blocks refer to Appendix C: Level Transducer
Block, Appendix C: Register Transducer Block, Appendix C: Advanced Configuration Transducer
Block, Appendix C: Resource Block, and Appendix C: Analog-Input Block.
Function blocks
The following function blocks are available for the Rosemount 5400 Series:
Analog Input (AI)
Proportional/Integral/Derivative (PID)
Control Selector (CSEL)
Output Splitter (OSPL)
Signal Characterizer (CHAR)
Integrator (INTEG)
Arithmetic (ARITH)
Input Selector (ISEL)
For detailed information about FOUNDATION fieldbus technology and function blocks used in the
Rosemount 5400 Series, refer to the FOUNDATION fieldbus Blocks Manual (Document No.
00809-0100-4783).
OUT = The block output value and status
OUT_D = Discrete output that signals a selected
alarm condition
OUT_D
OUT
AI
115
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.10 Application examples
5.10.1 Radar level transmitter - level value
Situation
A level gauge is measuring the level in a 33 ft (10 m) high tank.
Figure 5-17. Situation Diagram
Solution
Table 5-5 lists the appropriate configuration settings, and Figure 5-18 illustrates the correct
function block configuration.
Table 5-5. Analog-Input Function Block Configuration for a Typical Level Gauge
Figure 5-18. Analog-Input Function Block Diagram for a Typical Level Transmitter
Parameter Configured values
L_TYPE Direct
XD_SCALE Not Used
OUT_SCALE Not Used
CHANNEL CH1: Level
33 ft
(10 m)
100 %
0 %
Level measurement
To another
function block
OUT_D
OUT
AI function block
116
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.10.2 Radar level transmitter - level value in percent (%)
Situation
The level of a tank is to be measured using the Rosemount 5400 Series mounted on a nozzle on
the top of the tank. The maximum level in the tank is 46 ft (14 m). The level value will be
displayed in percentage of the full span (see Figure 5-19).
Figure 5-19. Situation Diagram
Solution
Table 5-6 lists the appropriate configuration settings, and Figure 5-20 illustrates the correct
function block configuration.
Table 5-6. Analog-Input Function Block Configuration for a Level Gauge where Level
Output is Scaled between 0-100 %
Figure 5-20. Function Block Diagram for a Level Gauge where Level Output is Scaled
between 0-100 %
Parameter Configured values
L_TYPE Indirect
XD_SCALE 0 to 14 m
OUT_SCALE 0 to 100 %
CHANNEL CH1: Level
46 ft
(14 m)
100 %
0 %
Level measurement
AI
function
block
OUT_D
OUT 0 to 100 %
117
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5.11 Tri-Loop™ HART to Analog Converter
The Rosemount 333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-Analog Signal Converter is capable of converting a
digital HART burst signal into three additional
4-20 mA analog signals.
To set the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter up for the HART Tri-Loop:
1. Make sure the Rosemount 5400 transmitter is properly configured.
2. Assign transmitter variables Primary Variable, Secondary Variable etc.
HART command [2, 1, 1].
RRM: Setup > Output/General.
3. Configure variable units: Length, Level Rate, Volume, and Temperature.
HART command [2, 2, 2, 5].
RRM: Setup > General/Units.
4. Set the Rosemount 5400 in Burst mode.
HART command [2, 2, 4, 2].
RRM: Setup > General/Communication.
Variables
Assignment
Variable
Units
118
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up
November 2014
Basic Configuration/Start-up
5. Select Burst option 3 = Process variables and current (Process vars/crnt).
HART command [2, 2, 4, 2, 2].
6. Install the Tri-Loop. Connect Channel 1 wires, and optionally wires for Channel 2 and
Channel 3.
7. Configure Tri-Loop Channel 1:
a. Assign variable: Tri-Loop HART command [1, 2, 2, 1, 1].
Make sure that the SV, TV, and QV match the configuration of the Rosemount 5400
Series transmitter.
b. Assign units: Tri-Loop HART command [1, 2, 2, 1, 2]. Make sure that the same units are
used as for the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter.
c. Set the Upper Range Value and the Lower Range Value: Tri-Loop HART command [1, 2,
2, 1, 3-4].
d. Enable the channel. Tri-Loop HART command [1, 2, 2, 1, 5].
8. (Optional) Repeat steps a-d for Channels 2 and 3.
9. Connect wires to Tri-Loop Burst Input.
10. Enter the desired tag, descriptor, and message information:
Tri-Loop HART command [1,2,3].
11. (Optional) If necessary, perform an analog output trim for Channel 1 (and Channel 2
and 3 if they are used).
Tri-Loop HART command [1, 1, 4].
Figure 5-21. Tri-Loop Wiring
See the reference manual for the Rosemount 333 HART Tri-Loop HART-to-Analog Signal
Converter (Document No. 00809-0100-4754) for further information on how to install and
configure the Tri-Loop.
Each Tri-Loop
Channel receives
power from
Control Room
Channel 1 must
be powered for
the Tri-Loop to
operate
Device receives
power from
Control Room
HART Burst Command 3/
Analog Output
IS Barrier
DIN Rail Mounted
HART Tri-Loop
Control Room
QV
TV
SV
PV
119
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
Section 6 Operation
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 119
Viewing measurement data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 120
LCD display error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 126
LED error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 127
6.1 Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this manual may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the safety messages listed at the beginning of each
section before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Use the equipment only as specified in this manual. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating environment of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations certifications.
Before connecting a HART-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
Electrical shock could cause death or serious injury.
Use extreme caution when making contact with the leads and terminals.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces (e.g. Rod antenna and Process Seal antenna)
may generate an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under extreme
conditions. Therefore, when the antenna is used in a potentially explosive
atmosphere, appropriate measures must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
Any substitution of non-authorized parts or repair, other than exchanging the complete
transmitter head or antenna assembly, may jeopardize safety and is prohibited.
Unauthorized changes to the product are strictly prohibited as they may unintentionally and
unpredictably alter performance and jeopardize safety. Unauthorized changes that interfere
with the integrity of the welds or flanges, such as making additional perforations, compromise
product integrity and safety. Equipment ratings and certifications are no longer valid on any
products that have been damaged or modified without the prior written permission of Emerson
Process Management. Any continued use of product that has been damaged or modified
without prior written authorization is at the customer's sole risk and expense.
120
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
6.2 Viewing measurement data
6.2.1 Using the display panel
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter uses an optional display panel to present measurement
data. When the transmitter is switched on, the display panel presents information, such as
transmitter model, measurement frequency, software version, communication type (HART, FF),
serial number, HART identification tag, setting of write protection switch, and Analog Output
settings.
When the transmitter is operating, the display panel presents level, signal amplitude, volume,
and other measurement data, depending on the display panel configuration (see “Specifying
display panel variables” on page 120).
The display has two rows, with the upper row showing the measured value and the bottom row
showing the parameter name and measurement unit. The display toggles between the different
variables every 2 seconds. Variables can be selected to be presented by using a Field
Communicator, the AMS Suite, DeltaV, or the RRM software.
Figure 6-1. The Rosemount 5400 Series Display Panel
Error messages are listed in sections “LCD display error messages” on page 126 and “LED error
messages” on page 127.
6.2.2 Specifying display panel variables
It is possible to specify the variables to be presented on the display panel (LCD display).
Using a Field Communicator
For a Field Communicator, the LCD display settings are available with
HART command [2, 2, 3].
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameters:
TRANSDUCER_1100 > LCD_PARAMETERS.
Toggling between
measurement
parameter and
measurement unit
Measurement value
121
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
Using RRM
The LCD tab in the General window allows variables to be specified for view on the Display Panel
screen:
1. Choose the General option from the Setup menu, or click the General icon in the
Device Configuration window.
2. Select the LCD tab.
Figure 6-2. RRM lets you Specify Variables for the Rosemount 5400 Series Display Panel
3. Select the variables to appear on the Display Panel. The LCD will alternate between the
selected items.
4. Click the Store button to save the LCD display settings in the transmitter database.
Device Config
General
122
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
Using AMS and DeltaV
The LCD tab in the Configure window specifies which variables will be shown on the Display Panel
screen:
1. Select the transmitter icon in the AMS and DeltaV explorer.
2. Click the right mouse button and choose the Configure option.
3. Select Manual Setup and choose the Display tab to set the desired LCD display
parameters and LCD display measurement units. The available LCD display parameters
are listed in Table 6-1 on page 6-123.
4. Click the Send button to save the configuration.
5. Close the window.
Figure 6-3. Configure Parameters to be Presented on the Display Panel
123
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
LCD display parameters
Table 6-1. LCD Display Parameters and Presentation on Display
Parameter Presentation on
display Description
Level LVL Product level.
Distance DST Distance from the upper reference point to the
product surface.
Level Rate LR The speed of level movement up or down.
Signal Strength AMP The signal amplitude of the surface echo.
Volume Only measurement unit
is shown. Total product volume.
Internal Temperature ITEMP Temperature inside the transmitter housing.
AOut Current ANOUT Analog Output 4 -20 mA current.
Percent of Range % RNG Level value in percent of total measurement range.
Comm Quality COM Q Digital communication signal quality.
124
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
6.2.3 Viewing measurement data in RRM
To view measurements, such as level, signal strength, etc. in RRM, choose the Tools > Device
Display option and select the Level tab:
Figure 6-4. Presentation of Measurement Data in RRM
To view the Analog Output signal, choose the Tools > Device Display option and select the
Analog Out tab:
Figure 6-5. Presentation of Analog Output Value in RRM
125
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
6.2.4 Viewing measurement data in AMS Suite and DeltaV
To view measurements, such as level, signal strength, etc. in the AMS Suite:
1. Select the transmitter icon in the AMS Suite Device Connection View window.
2. Click the right mouse button and choose the Overview option.
Figure 6-6. Presentation of Measurement Data in AMS Suite
126
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
6.3 LCD display error messages
Figure 6-7. The Rosemount 5400 Series Display Panel Displaying an Error Message
Table 6-2. Error Messages Displayed on the Rosemount 5400 Series Display Panel
For more information on errors, see “Error Messages” on page 154.
Error message Description
RAM FAIL An error in the gauge data memory (RAM) has been detected during the
startup tests.
NOTE: this resets the gauge automatically.
FPROM FAIL An error in the gauge program memory (FPROM) has been detected
during the startup tests.
NOTE: this resets the gauge automatically.
HREG FAIL
An error in the transmitter configuration memory (EEPROM) has been
detected. The error is either a checksum error that can be solved by
loading the default database or a hardware error.
NOTE: the default values are used until the problem is solved.
OMEM FAIL Other memory failure.
MWM FAIL An error in the microwave module.
DPLY FAIL An error in the LCD display.
MODEM FAIL Modem hardware failure.
AOUT FAIL An error in the Analog Out Module.
OHW FAIL An unspecified hardware error has been detected.
ITEMP FAIL An error in the internal temperature measurement.
MEAS FAIL A serious measurement error has been detected.
CONFIG FAIL At least one configuration parameter is outside the allowed range.
NOTE: the default values are used until the problem is solved.
SW FAIL An error has been detected in the transmitter software.
Error message
127
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
6.4 LED error messages
For Rosemount 5400 Series transmitters without a display, a flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED)
is used to present error messages.
Figure 6-8. Rosemount 5400 Series Transmitters without Display use a LED for the
Presentation of Error Messages
In normal operation, the LED flashes orange once every other second. When an error occurs, the
LED flashes a sequence that corresponds to the Code number followed by a five second pause,
and this sequence is continuously repeated.
The following errors can be displayed:
Table 6-3. LED Error Codes
Example
Modem error (code 6) is displayed as the following flash sequence:
Code Error
0 Ram Failure
1FPROM
2HREG
4 Microwave Module
5 Display
6Modem
7Analog Out
8Internal Temperature
11 Hardware
12 Measurement
14 Configuration
15 Software
Flashing LED
Seconds
128
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 6: Operation
November 2014
Operation
129
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Section 7 Service and Troubleshooting
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 129
Troubleshooting overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 131
Service overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 132
Analog Output calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 142
Logging measurement data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 143
Backing up the transmitter configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 144
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 145
Configuration report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 147
Viewing input and holding registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 148
Reset to factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 149
Surface search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 150
Using the Simulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 151
Write protecting a transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 152
Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 163
7.1 Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this manual may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the safety messages listed at the beginning of each
section before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Note
The antenna seal assembly should under no circumstances be disassembled.
130
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Failure to follow safe installation and service guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform installation or service.
Use the equipment only as specified in this manual. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Any substitution of non-authorized parts or repair, other than exchanging the
complete transmitter head or antenna assembly, may jeopardize safety and is
prohibited.
Unauthorized changes to the product are strictly prohibited as they may
unintentionally and unpredictably alter performance and jeopardize safety.
Unauthorized changes that interfere with the integrity of the welds or flanges, such as
making additional perforations, compromise product integrity and safety. Equipment
ratings and certifications are no longer valid on any products that have been damaged
or modified without the prior written permission of Emerson Process Management.
Any continued use of product that has been damaged or modified without prior
written authorization is at the customer's sole risk and expense.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating environment of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations specifications.
In an Explosion-proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter cover
when power is applied to the unit.
Before connecting a HART® based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Make sure the main power to the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is off and the
lines to any other external power source are disconnected or not powered while wiring
the transmitter.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces (e.g. Rod antenna and Process Seal antenna)
may generate an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under extreme
conditions.
Therefore, when the antenna is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere,
appropriate measures must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
131
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.2 Troubleshooting overview
Table 7-1 below gives information on the possible causes of system malfunctions. It also lists the
symptoms and necessary actions to be taken.
Table 7-1. Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom Possible cause Action
No level reading • Power disconnected
• Data communication cables
disconnected
• Check the power supply
• Check the cables for serial data communication
• Check LED/Display
No HART communication • COM Port configuration does
not match the connected COM
Port
• Cables may be disconnected
• Wrong HART address is used
• Hardware failure
• HART resistor
• Check that correct COM Port is selected in the HART server (see
“Specifying the COM port” on page 87)
• Check the COM port buffer, “Specifying the COM port” on
page 87
• Check wiring diagram
• Verify that the 250 : resistor is in the loop, see Figure 4-23 on
page 70
•Check cables
• Make sure that correct HART short address is used. Try address
= 0
• Check the COM Port Buffer setting, see page 88
• Check Analog Output current value to verify that transmitter
hardware works
Analog Out is set in Alarm •Measurement failure or
transmitter failure
• Open the Diagnostics window in RRM to check active errors
and alarms, see “Diagnostics” on page 145
•See also “Analyzing the measurement signal” on page 132 and
“Analog Output status” on page 158
Incorrect level reading • Configuration error
• Disturbing objects in the tank
• See “Application errors” on
page 159
• Check the Tank Height parameter; RRM>Setup>Tank
• Check status information and diagnostics information, see
“Diagnostics” on page 145
• Check that the transmitter has not locked on an interfering
object
•See “Analyzing the measurement signal” on page 132
Integral display does not work • Check the display configuration in RRM (open menu Setup >
General)
•Diagnostics
• Contact Emerson Process Management Service Department(1)
(1) A malfunctioning display panel may only be replaced by service personnel at the Emerson Process Management Service Department.
Temperature measurement failure • Check ambient temperature(2)
•Restart gauge
• Contact Emerson Process Management Service Department
(2) If the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter has been exposed to temperatures outside the specified limits, the device may stop its normal operation.
Level measurement failure • Check Power Supply
• Check the gauge configuration
• Check that the mechanical installation is correct
Volume measurement failure •Restart gauge
• Check gauge configuration using PC Based configuration tool
No surface echo • Check signal strength
• Restart transmitter
•See “Analyzing the measurement signal” on page 132
132
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.3 Service overview
The functions mentioned in this section are available in the RRM configuration program.
7.3.1 Analyzing the measurement signal
RRM, and other tools using enhanced EDDL, has powerful functions for advanced troubleshoot-
ing. By using the Echo Curve plot function, an instant view of the tank signal is displayed.
Measurement problems can be resolved by studying the position and amplitude of the different
pulses.
Figure 7-1. The Echo Curve Presents all Visible Echoes
In a typical measurement situation, the following pulses appear in the diagram:
Reference. This pulse is caused by the transition between transmitter head and antenna and it is
used by the transmitter as a reference at level measurements.
A missing reference pulse might be a symptom of a malfunctioning transmitter. Contact your
local Emerson Process Management representative for assistance.
Product surface. This pulse is caused by a reflection on the product surface.
Different amplitude thresholds are used to filter out unwanted signals and pick up different
pulses. The transmitter uses certain criteria to decide which type of pulse that is detected.
Echoes found above the Surface Threshold might be considered the product surface.
Surface threshold. The amplitude threshold used for detecting the product level peak. The
amplitude threshold is designed as a number of individually adjustable amplitude threshold
points, the ATC. See “ATC” on page 84.
The ATC is set during the Measure and Learn function and can be adjusted manually. The ATC is
used for filtering out disturbances with an amplitude smaller than the product surface echo.
Reference
Product
surface
Unknown
Hold off
distance
Ta nk
bottom
False echo
Surface threshold / ATC
133
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
The surface thresholds should be set to approximately 20 % of the measured signal amplitude of
the product surface.
False echo area. False Echo Areas are set during the Measure and Learn function (see “Guided
setup” on page 92), when the disturbing object is larger than the surface echo. The False Echo
Area can be adjusted manually.
Hold off distance - upper null zone. Measurements are not performed within the hold off
distance. By setting the hold off distance to zero, measurements can be performed close to the
flange. Consider near zone accuracy. See “Near zone accuracy” on page 193.
Tank bottom. Measurements are not performed after the Tank Bottom limit.
7.3.2 Surface pulse not found
The amplitude thresholds are adjusted manually or during the Measure and Learn function to
appropriate values to filter out noise and other non-valid measurements from the measurement
signal.
The amplitude of the measurement signal, that is the amplitude of the signal reflected by the
product surface, is related to the actual dielectric constant of the product.
RRM has a plot function that allows viewing of the reflections in the tank.
If the amplitude threshold is too high, the product level will not be detected, as illustrated in
Figure 7-2. In a situation like this, the amplitude threshold is lowered so that the Surface peak is
not filtered out.
Figure 7-2. Example 1: Surface Threshold is Too High
If there are disturbing objects in the tank, the threshold must be set carefully to avoid locking on
the wrong amplitude peak. In Figure 7-3, the transmitter has locked on a peak above the actual
product surface, that is a disturbance was interpreted as the product surface.
Amplitude, mV
The surface threshold is above
the surface peak
Surface threshold =
ATC
Distance, m
Reference
134
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Figure 7-3. Example 2: Surface Threshold is Too Low
By adjusting the surface threshold, the product surface is properly detected, as illustrated in
Figure 7-4:
Figure 7-4. Echo Curve after Surface Threshold was Adjusted
To adjust the amplitude thresholds, see “Using the Echo Curve Analyzer” on page 137.
In the Echo Curve Analyzer in RRM, the amplitude threshold points can easily be dragged to the
desired values.
Amplitude, mV
Actual surface
Surface threshold =
ATC
Distance, m
P1 - Disturbing echo
misinterpreted as
product surface
Reference
Amplitude, mV
Distance, m
After surface threshold is adjusted,
the product surface is correctly
detected
Surface Threshold =
ATC
Reference
135
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.3.3 Registration of false echoes
The False Echo function improves the performance of the gauge when the surface is close to a
horizontal surface of a static object in the tank. The object causes an echo when it is above the
surface. When the echoes from the surface and the object are close to each other, they may
interfere and cause a decrease in performance.
Figure 7-5. The Rosemount 5400 Series can Handle Disturbing Radar Echoes
The False Echo function allows registration of disturbing echoes caused by objects in the tank.
When the surface is passing a disturbing object, the transmitter measures with higher reliability
if the position of the object is registered. This makes it possible to detect a product surface close
to a disturbance echo even if the surface echo is weaker than the disturbing echo. Follow these
recommendations before registering new interfering echoes:
Make sure a correct ATC is set before registering any disturbance echoes (see “ATC” on
page 84).
Compare the list of interfering echoes with the tank drawing or visual inspection of the
tank. Note any objects like beams, heating coils, agitators, etc. which correspond to the
found echoes. Only register echoes above the ATC which can be clearly identified as
objects in the tank, keeping the number of registered echoes to a minimum.
Make sure the level is stable before registering a disturbance echo. A fluctuating level
may indicate a temporary disturbance that is not from an interfering object.
Do not register False Echoes located below the product surface. It is recommended that
registration be done when the tank is empty.
False echo
Surface echo
Disturbing
objects
136
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Figure 7-6. Disturbing Echoes can be Filtered Out by Registration as False Echoes
The False Echo Registration function is available in the RRM program, in the AMS Suite, as well as
for the Field Communicator.
Registered false echo
Amplitude, mV
Distance, m
137
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.3.4 Using the Echo Curve Analyzer
The Echo Curve in RRM shows the measurement signal amplitude in the tank and includes the
Echo Tuning functionality (see “Echo tuning” on page 83 for more information on false echo
handling).
To plot the measurement signal:
1. Start the RRM program.
2. Open Device Config/Tools (or Device Config/Setup).
3. Click the Echo Curve icon (see Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7. The Echo Curve Function is a Useful Tool for Signal Analysis
4. The Echo Curve Analyzer window appears with the View/Record Mode tab (or the
Configuration Mode tab) selected.
Device Config
Setup
138
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
The Configuration Mode tab
The Configuration Mode tab allows for adjustment of the different amplitude thresholds. When
clicking the Echo Curve icon under Device Config/Setup, the Echo Curve Analyzer window appears
with the Configuration Mode tab selected:
Figure 7-8. Echo Curve Analyzer Plot in Configuration Mode
The Measure and Learn function in RRM automatically creates an ATC used by the Rosemount
5400 Series transmitter to find the surface pulse. The ATC is adapted to the shape of the
measurement signal as described in “Echo tuning” on page 83.
To create an ATC, click the Learn button in the Echo Curve Analyzer/Configuration Mode window.
By clicking the Learn button, the Measure and Learn function is activated and creates an ATC
that filters out all disturbing echoes. The ATC can also be edited manually if further fine tuning is
needed.
The Configuration Mode window also allows the changing of the amplitude thresholds manually,
simply by dragging the corresponding anchoring points in the plot to the desired positions.
Note
By changing the amplitude thresholds in the Echo Curve plot manually, the Automatic mode is
disabled for the corresponding threshold.
The Set Thresholds button sets the ATC to a fixed value based on the configured Dielectric
Constant of the product.
To register a false echo, right-click and select Register as false echo.
Set Threshold
Measure and Learn
139
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
The View/Record Mode tab
The View/Record Mode tab presents a plot of the current tank conditions where each radar echo
is displayed as a peak in the signal plot.
When clicking the Echo Curve icon under Device Config/Tools, the Echo Curve Analyzer window
appears with the View/Record Mode tab selected:
Figure 7-9. A Echo Curve Plot in View/Record Mode
Advanced
The Advanced button opens a list below the Echo Curve plot with information on all echoes in
the tank, such as signal amplitude and position in the tank.
Play
When the Play button is clicked, the tank is continuously updated without being stored.
Record tank spectra
This function records tank spectra over time. This can be a useful function if, for example,
studying the tank signal when filling or emptying the tank is desired.
File mode tab
The File Mode tab will open files with saved snapshots/movies to be presented in the spectrum
plot. A movie file can be played to view the amplitude plot at the desired update rate.
Record tank spectra
Play (continuously updates the spectrum)
140
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.3.5 Using the Echo Curve Analyzer with a Field Communicator
The Field Communicator supports the EDDL with enhancements that allows viewing of the Echo
Curve, creating an ATC, and specifying amplitude thresholds, such as the Surface Threshold.
Viewing the Echo Curve
To view the Echo Curve:
1. Select HART command [2, 5, 2, 3].
FOUNDATION fieldbus parameter:
TRANSDUCER_1300 > AMPLITUDE_THRESHOLD_CURVE
The Echo Curve appears on the display:
2. Use the Hand and Zoom tools to view specific parts of the Echo Curve. The drop down
list allows for choosing items, such as the different amplitude thresholds to be
displayed in the plot.
The Echo Curve plot also shows an ATC if available. See “ATC” on page 84 for more
information.
141
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Register false echoes
To register false echoes:
1. Select HART command [2, 5, 1].
2. Select option 1 Found Echo Peaks to display found echoes.
3. Select option 2 Add False Echo... to register false echoes based on distance.
Threshold settings
To adjust the amplitude thresholds:
1. Select HART command [2, 5, 2].
The different echo curve options appear on the display:
2. Select option 1 Measure and Learn to create an ATC, see “ATC” on page 84 for more
information.
Select option 2 Set Threshold to specify a constant Surface Threshold.
3. Click the SAVE button to store the new settings in the transmitter database.
1 Found Echo Peaks
2 Measurement Output
3 Registered False Echoes
4 Add False Echo...
5 Remove False Echo...
Peaks
142
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.4 Analog Output calibration
This function calibrates the Analog Output by comparing the actual output current with the
nominal 4 mA and 20 mA currents. Calibration is done at the factory and normally the
transmitter does not need to be recalibrated.
The Analog Output calibration function is available via the
HART command [2, 7, 1].
In RRM, this function is available via Setup > Output.
To calibrate the Analog Output current:
1. Start RRM and make sure that the transmitter communicates with the PC.
2. Select the Output icon in the Device Config/Setup toolbar.
3. Select the Analog Out tab in the Output window.
4. Select the Calibrate DAC button.
5. Follow the instructions to calibrate the 4 mA and the 20 mA outputs.
143
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.5 Logging measurement data
By using the Log Device Registers function in the RRM software, Input and Holding registers are
logged over time. It is possible to choose from different pre-defined sets of registers. This
function is useful for verifying that the transmitter is working properly.
To log device registers, choose the Tools > Log Device Registers option to open the Log Registers
window:
To begin logging:
1. Select the Browse button, select a directory to store the log file, and type a log file title.
2. Select the Select Register button and choose the register type to be logged.
3. Select the desired registers to be logged. There are three options available: Standard,
Service, and Custom. Standard and Service refer to pre-defined sets of registers. The
Custom option allows the user to choose the desired range of registers.
4. Enter the update rate. An update rate of 10 seconds means that the plot will update
every 10 seconds.
5. Select the Start Log button. The logging will proceed until the Stop Log button is
selected.
Start Log
Browse Select Register
Update rate
144
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.6 Backing up the transmitter configuration
Use this RRM option to make a backup copy of the configuration parameters in the transmitter
database. The backup file can be used to restore the transmitter configuration. It can also be
used for configuration of a transmitter in a similar application. Parameters in the saved file can
be uploaded directly to the new device. It is recommended to store the transmitter
configuration in a backup file.
The backup function is available from the Device menu in RRM.
To make a backup copy of the configuration parameters:
1. From the Device menu, choose the Backup Config to File option.
2. Browse to the desired directory.
3. Enter a name for the backup file and select the Save button, so the transmitter
configuration is stored. The backup file can be used at a later stage to restore an
accidentally changed configuration. The backup file can also be used to quickly
configure transmitters installed on similar tanks. To upload a backup configuration,
choose the Upload Config to Device option from the Device menu.
The backup file can be viewed using the Backup File Reader installed with the RRM
software:
4. The backup file can also be viewed as a text file in a word processing program such as
Notepad:
See “Configuration report” on page 147 for further information on viewing backup files.
Backup File
Reader
145
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.7 Diagnostics
The following information about the device can be retrieved:
“Device status” on page 153
“Errors” on page 154
“Warnings” on page 155
“Measurement status” on page 155
“Volume calculation status” on page 157
“Analog Output status” on page 158
RRM
To open the Diagnostics window in RRM, choose the Diagnostics option from the Tools menu.
146
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
AMS and DeltaV
To view the Diagnostics window in AMS Suite, click the right mouse button on the desired
transmitter and choose the Configure option. Select Service Tools and the tab Active Alerts.
Detailed Status is found in Details/Device:
Device
147
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.8 Configuration report
This RRM function shows the configuration changes made to the transmitter compared to the
factory configuration. The report compares a specified backup file with the default transmitter
configuration.
To open the Configuration Report, choose the Tools > Configuration Report menu option:
Information is presented on antenna type, software versions, software and hardware
configuration, and unit code.
148
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.9 Viewing input and holding registers
Measured data is continuously stored in the Input Registers and by viewing the contents,
advanced users can check if the transmitter is working properly.
The Holding Registers store various transmitter parameters, such as configuration data, used to
control the measurement performance.
By using the RRM program, most Holding Registers can be edited by typing a new value in the
appropriate Value input field. Some Holding Registers can be edited in a separate window and
the individual data bits can be changed.
To view the Input/Holding registers in RRM, the Service Mode must be activated:
1. Choose the Enter Service Mode option from the Service menu.
2. Type the password (default password is “admin”).
3. The View Input / Holding Registers option is now available.
4. Choose the View Input / Holding Registers option from the Service menu.
5. Select the Read button. To change a Holding register value, enter a new value in the
corresponding Value field. Select the Store button to save the new value.
Figure 7-10. Holding and Input Registers
149
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.10 Reset to factory settings
This function resets all, or a specific part, of the holding registers to the factory settings. It is
recommended that a backup of the configuration be made before resetting, so the old
transmitter configuration can be loaded, if necessary.
RRM: choose menu option Tools > Factory Settings.
AMS Suite: Tools / Service > Factory Settings.
HART Command: [1, 2, 8].
AMS and DeltaV
1. In the AMS/DeltaV explorer, select Configure/Service Tools, and choose Reset to
Factory Settings.
2. Choose the Factory Settings option.
Reset to
Factory Settings
150
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.11 Surface search
The Surface Search command triggers a search for the product surface and can be used, for
example, if the measured level is locked onto a disturbing object in the tank (see “Configuration
report” on page 147).
AMS and DeltaV
1. In the AMS and DeltaV explorer select Configure/Manual setup, choose the Echo
Tuning tab, and select Search for Surface.
2. Choose the Surface Search option.
Search for Surface
151
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.12 Using the Simulation Mode
This function can be used to simulate measurements and alarms.
RRM: choose menu option Tools > Simulation Mode:
AMS Suite: Tools > Service > Simulation Mode.
HART Command: [3, 2, 1, 3].
AMS and DeltaV
1. In the AMS/DeltaV explorer select Configure/Service Tools, choose Simulate to setup
simulation mode:
Simulate
152
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.13 Write protecting a transmitter
A Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter can be password protected from unintentional
configuration changes. The default password is 12345 and it is recommended that this
password not be changed to facilitate service and maintenance of the transmitter.
RRM: Tools > Lock / Unlock Configuration Area.
AMS Suite: Tools > Service > Lock / Unlock Device.
HART Command [3, 2, 1, 2].
AMS and DeltaV
1. In the AMS/DeltaV explorer select Configure/Manual setup, choose the Device tab
and select Lock/Unlock Device.
2. Choose the Unlock/Lock Device option.
Lock/Unlock Device
153
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.14 Diagnostic messages
7.14.1 Troubleshooting
If there is a malfunction, despite no diagnostic messages, see Table 7-1 on page 131 for
information on possible causes.
Note
If the transmitter housing needs to be removed for service, make sure the antenna PTFE sealing
is carefully protected against dust and water.
7.14.2 Device status
Device Status messages that may appear on the Integral Display, on the Field Communicator, or
in the RRM program are shown in Table 7-2:
Table 7-2. Device Status
Message Description Action
Running Boot Software The application software could not
be started. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Device Warning A device warning is active. See “Warning Messages” on
page 155 for details.
Device Error A device error is active. See “Error Messages” on page 154
for details.
Simulation Mode The simulation mode is active. Turn off the simulation mode.
Advanced Simulation Mode The advanced simulation mode is
active.
To turn off the Advanced
Simulation mode, set Holding
Register 3600 = 0 (see “Analog
Output calibration” on page 142).
Invalid Measurement The level measurement is invalid.
Check “Error Messages” on
page 154, “Warning Messages” on
page 155 and “Measurement
Status” on page 155 for details.
Software Write Protected The configuration registers are
write protected.
Use the Lock/Unlock function to
turn off the write protection (see
“Write protecting a transmitter”
on page 152).
Hardware Write Protected The Write Protection switch is
enabled.
Set the Write Protection switch to
Off. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department
for information.
Factory Settings Used The factory default configuration is
used.
The transmitter calibration is lost.
Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
User Area Write Protected The configuration area is write
protected.
See “Write protecting a
transmitter” on page 152 for
details.
154
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.14.3 Errors
Error messages that may be displayed on the Integral Display, on a Field Communicator, in AMS,
or in the RRM program, are shown in Table 7-3. Errors normally result in an Analog Output
alarm.
Errors are indicated in RRM in the Diagnostics window.
Table 7-3. Error Messages
Message Description Action
RAM Error
An error in the gauge data memory
(RAM) has been detected during
the startup tests.
NOTE: this resets the gauge
automatically.
Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
FPROM Error
An error in the gauge program
memory (FPROM) has been
detected during the startup tests.
NOTE: this resets the gauge
automatically.
Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
HREG Error
An error in the transmitter
configuration memory (EEPROM)
has been detected. The error is
either a checksum error that can
be solved by loading the default
database or a hardware error.
NOTE: the default values are used
until the problem is solved.
Load default database and restart
the transmitter. Contact Emerson
Process Management Service
Department if the problem
persists.
MWM Error An error in the microwave module. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Display Error An error in the LCD. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Modem Error Modem hardware failure. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Analog Out Error An error in the Analog Out Module. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Internal Temp Error An error in internal temperature
measurement. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Other HW Error An unspecified hardware error has
been detected. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Meas Error A serious measurement error has
been detected. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Config Error
At least one configuration
parameter is outside the allowed
range.
NOTE: the default values are used
until the problem is solved.
Load the default database and
restart the transmitter (see “Reset
to factory settings” on page 149)
Configure the transmitter or
upload a backup configuration file
(see “Backing up the transmitter
configuration” on page 144)
Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department
if the problem persists
SW Error An error has been detected in the
transmitter software. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
155
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.14.4 Warnings
Table 7-4 is a list of diagnostic messages that may be displayed on the Integral Display, on the
Field Communicator, or in the RRM program. Warnings are less serious than errors, and in most
cases, do not result in Analog Output alarms.
Warnings are indicated in RRM in the Diagnostics window.
Table 7-4. Warning Messages
7.14.5 Measurement status
Measurement Status messages that may appear on the Integral Display, on the Field
Communicator, or in the RRM program are shown in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5. Measurement Status
Message Description Action
RAM warning
See Diagnostics (RRM: Tools > Diagnostics) for further information on a
warning message.
See also “Diagnostics” on page 145.
FPROM warning
Hreg warning
MWM warning
LCD warning
Modem warning
Analog out warning
Internal temperature
warning
Other hardware warning
Measurement warning
Config warning
SW warning
Message Description Action
Full tank The level measurement is in Full
Tank state. The transmitter waits
for the surface echo to be detected
at the top of the tank.
The transmitter leaves the Full Tank
state when the product surface gets
below the Full Tank Detection Area, see
“Full tank handling” on page 241 and
“Full tank handling” on page 247.
Empty tank The level measurement is in Empty
Tank state. The transmitter waits
for the surface echo to be detected
at the bottom of the tank.
The transmitter leaves the Empty Tank
state when the product surface gets
above the Empty Tank Detection Area,
see “Empty tank handling” on
page 239 and “Empty tank handling”
on page 243.
Reference pulse invalid An error in the reference pulse in
the last sampled tank signal. Check Warning messages. If
MicroWave Module (MWM) Warning is
active, this might indicate a transmitter
error. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Sweep linearization
warning The sweep is not correctly
linearized. Check Warning messages. If MWM
Warning is active, this might indicate a
transmitter error. Contact Emerson
Process Management Service
Department.
156
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Tank signal clip warning The last Tank Signal was clipped. Check Warning Messages. If MWM
Warning is active, this might indicate a
transmitter error. Contact Emerson
Process Management Service
Department.
No surface echo The Surface Echo Pulse cannot be
detected. Check if the configuration can be
changed so that the surface echo can
be tracked in this current region.
Predicted level The presented level is predicted.
The surface echo could not be
detected.
See No surface echo above.
Sampling failed The sampling of the last tank signal
failed. Check Warning Messages.
Invalid volume value The given volume value is invalid. Check Volume Status for details.
Simulation Mode The simulation mode is active. The
presented measurement values are
simulated.
No action needed.
Advanced Simulation
Mode The advanced simulation mode is
active. The given measurements
are simulated.
To turn off the Advanced Simulation
mode, set Holding Register 3600 = 0
(see “Analog Output calibration” on
page 142).
Tracking Extra Echo The transmitter is in the empty
tank state tracking an extra echo. See “Extra echo” on page 240 and
page 245.
Bottom Projection The bottom projection function is
active. See “Tank bottom projection” on
page 240.
Using pipe
measurement Pipe Measurement is active. No action needed.
Surface close to
registered false echo. Close to a registered false echo
measurement accuracy may be
slightly reduced.
By using the Register False Echo
function, the transmitter can track the
product surface in the vicinity of
disturbing objects (see “Echo tuning”
on page 83).
Sudden level jump
detected. This may result from various
measurement problems. Check the tank to find out what causes
problem tracking the surface.
Message Description Action
157
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.14.6 Volume calculation status
Volume calculation status messages that may appear on the integral display, on the Field
Communicator, or in the RRM program are shown in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6. Volume Status
Message Description Action
Level is below lowest
strapping point.
The measured level is below the
lowest point in the given strapping
table.
For a correct volume calculation in
this region, change the strapping
table.
Level is above highest
strapping point.
The measured level is above the
highest point in the given
strapping table.
For a correct volume calculation in
this region, change the strapping
table.
Level out of range. The measured level is outside the
given tank shape.
Check if the correct tank type is
chosen, and check the configured
Tank Height.
Strap table length not valid. The configured strap table length
is too small or too large.
Change the strapping table size to
a valid number of strapping points.
A maximum number of 20
strapping points can be entered.
Strap table not valid. The strapping table is not correctly
configured.
Check that both level and volume
values in the strapping table are
increasing with strapping table
index.
Level not valid. The measured level is not valid. No
volume value can be calculated.
Check “Measurement Status” on
page 155, “Warning Messages” on
page 155, and “Error Messages” on
page 154.
Volume configuration
missing. No volume calculation method is
chosen. Configure Volume.
Volume not valid. The calculated volume is not valid. Check the other volume status
messages for the reason.
158
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.14.7 Analog Output status
Analog Output status messages that may appear on the integral display, on the Field
Communicator or in the RRM program are shown in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7. Analog Output Status
Message Description Action
Not connected Analog output hardware is not
connected. Contact Emerson Process
Management Service Department.
Alarm mode The analog output is in Alarm
Mode.
Check “Error Messages” on
page 154 and “Warning Messages”
on page 155 to find the reason for
the Alarm.
Saturated The analog output signal value is
saturated, that is equal to the
saturation value. No action needed.
Multidrop The transmitter is in Multidrop
Mode. The analog output is fixed at
4 mA.
This is the normal setting when a
device is used in Multidrop
configuration.
Fixed current mode The analog output is in fixed
current mode. This mode is used when calibrating
the Analog Output channel.
Invalid limits The given Upper and Lower Range
Values are invalid.
Check that the difference between
the Upper and Lower Range Value
is greater than the Minimum Span.
159
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.14.8 Application errors
When product surface is
near the tank bottom, the
transmitter enters alarm
mode (see “Alarm mode”
on page 81).
May be caused by reduction of
projected surface area close to sloping
tank bottom.
Action:
• Increase parameter Empty Tank
Detection Area if measurement in this
region is not crucial, see “Empty tank
detection area” on page 240 and
244
• Make sure that the Bottom Echo Visible
parameter is not set, see “Bottom
echo visible” on page 240 and 243
Incorrect level. Action:
• Check Tank Height configuration
• For rapid level changes, check the
Damping Value. (See “Damping
value” on page 243)
Incorrect level. May be caused by wrong Range Value
settings.
Action:
• Check that the Upper Range Value
matches the 100 % level in the tank
Incorrect level when using
a pipe. May be caused by an incorrectly
configured Pipe Inner Diameter.
Action:
• Check that the actual Pipe Inner
Diameter matches the configured Inner
Diameter
Alarm
160
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Measured value is locked. May be caused by a disturbing object in
the tank
Action:
• Remove the disturbing object
• Move the transmitter to another
position
• Use the Echo Tuning function in RRM to
register the false echo causing the
transmitter to lock at the wrong level,
see “Echo tuning” on page 83
• Put an inclined metal plate on top of
the disturbing object
Measured value drops to
zero level. May be caused by strong echoes from
the tank bottom when the product is
slightly transparent.
Action:
• Check the Tank Height
• Make sure that the Bottom Echo Visible
parameter is enabled, see “Bottom
echo visible” on page 240 and 243
•Try using the Tank Bottom Projection
function if the following conditions are
met:
- The product is transparent
- The tank bottom echo is visible
Measured value drops to
zero level.
(You can verify Empty
Tank state by opening the
Tank Display window in
RRM).
If the transmitter loses track of the
surface within the Empty Tank
Detection Area, the tank is considered
empty. See section “Empty tank
detection area” on page 240 and 244.
Action:
If possible, try another mounting
position.
Measured level jumps to a
lower value. May be caused by:
• Two products layered in the tank
Action:
• Enable the Double Surface function,
see “Surface echo tracking” on
page 242
RRM: Setup > Advanced
161
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Incorrect measurement
level when the product
surface is above the 50 %
level.
May be caused by:
• Radar echo bouncing from the product
surface to the tank roof then back to
the surface
• Strong echoes from a very high
reflectivity product
Action:
• Move the transmitter from the center
of the tank roof
• Enable the Double Bounce function, see
“Double bounce” on page 241 and 248
RRM: Setup > Advanced
Measured level jumps to a
higher value. May be caused by:
• Foam on the product surface
• Turbulent product surface
Action:
• Enable the Tank Environment Foam
parameter
RRM: Setup > Tank > Environment
HART: [2, 3, 2]
• Enable the Tank Environment Turbulent
Surface parameter
RRM: Setup > Tank > Environment
HART: [2, 3, 2]
Measured level gets
locked near the top of the
tank.
May be caused by:
• Antenna tip ends inside the tank nozzle
• Disturbing objects near the antenna
• Product built up on the antenna
Action:
• Mount the transmitter on another
nozzle, if possible
• Increase the Hold Off distance
RRM: Setup > Advanced
HART: [2, 3, 4]
The level value drops to a
lower value when the
product surface is close to
the antenna.
May be caused by:
• Product level within the Hold Off
region, that is outside the approved
measuring range, and the transmitter is
picking up secondary signal reflections
Action:
• Avoid filling the tank to levels close to
the antenna
• Move the transmitter to increase the
distance between maximum product
level and antenna, if possible
• Activate the Full Tank Handling
function if measurements up to the
antenna are required, see “Full tank
handling” on page 241 and 247
162
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
The transmitter displays
“measurement error” and
activates Measurement
Alarm when the product
level is close to the
antenna.
May be caused by:
• Product level within the Hold Off
region, that is outside the approved
measuring range
Action:
• Avoid filling the tank to levels very close
to the antenna
• Move the transmitter to increase the
distance between maximum product
level and antenna, if possible
• Activate the Full Tank Handling
function if measurements up to the
antenna are required, see “Full tank
handling” on page 241 and 247
The measured level is
unstable. May be caused by:
• An empty tank with the Amplitude
Threshold too low
• Product surface is close to a registered
False Echo
Action:
• Create a new ATC, see “Echo tuning” on
page 83
Alarm
163
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.15 Troubleshooting
If there is a malfunction despite the absence of diagnostic messages, see Table 7-8 for
information on the possible causes.
Note
If the transmitter housing must be removed for service, make sure that the PTFE seal is carefully
protected against dust and water.
Table 7-8. Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom Possible cause Action
No level reading • Power disconnected
• Data communication cables disconnected
• Check the power supply.
• Check the cables for serial data
communication.
Incorrect level reading
• Configuration error
• Disturbing objects in the tank
• See “Application errors” on page 159
• Check the Tank Height parameter; RRM >
Setup > Tank.
• Check status information and diagnostics
information, see “Diagnostics” on
page 145.
• Check that the transmitter has not locked
on an interfering object.
Integral display does not work
• Check the display configuration;
RRM > Setup > General.
•Diagnostics.
• Contact Emerson Process Management
Service Department(1)
FOUNDATION fieldbus Card to Transmitter
Communication Fault
• Verify Device Mode setting, should be
FOUNDATION fieldbus
(Parameter: ENV_DEVICE_MODE)
• Restart method from Resource Block
• Reboot gauge: cycle power to the device. If
error persists, replace the transmitter head.
Level Measurement Failure
• Analyze the echo curve for possible reasons
• Check device configuration
• Check physical installation of device (for
example, antenna contamination)
• Load default database to the device
• Reconfigure the device. If error persists,
replace the transmitter head.
Internal Temperature Critical • Replace the transmitter head
Volume Measurement Failure
• If Level Measurement Failure is active, clear
that alert first
• Check volume configuration
• Load default database to the device
• Reconfigure the device. If error persists,
replace the transmitter head.
No surface echo • Check signal strength
• Restart transmitter
Tank Signal Clip Warning Restart transmitter
Empty Tank/ Full Tank Information of tank status
164
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
7.15.1 Resource block
This section describes error conditions found in the Resource block. Read Table 7-9 through
Table 7-11 to determine the appropriate corrective action.
Block errors
Table 7-9 lists conditions reported in the BLOCK_ERR parameter.
Table 7-9. Resource Block BLOCK_ERR Messages
Table 7-10. Resource Block SUMMARY_STATUS Messages
Configuration Reg Password Enabled Information, Ready Write Data
DB Error/ Microwave Unit Error/
Configuration Error/ Other Error
• Restart transmitter
• Download Application Software
• Set database to default; load default
Database
•Call Service Center
SW Error/ Display Error/ Analog Out Error • Restart transmitter
•Call Service Center
(1) A malfunctioning display panel may only be replaced by service personnel at the Emerson Process Management Service Department. A display must not be replaced
when the transmitter is in operation.
Condition name and description
Other
Simulate active: This indicates that the simulation switch is in place.
This is not an indication that the I/O blocks are using simulated data.
Device fault state set
Device needs maintenance soon
Memory failure: A memory failure has occurred in the FLASH, RAM, or EEPROM
memory
Lost static data: Static data that is stored in non-volatile memory has been lost
Lost NV data: Non-volatile data that is stored in non-volatile memory has been lost
Device needs maintenance now
Out of service: The actual mode is out of service
Condition name
Uninitialized
No repair needed
Repairable
Call Service Center
Symptom Possible cause Action
165
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Table 7-11. Resource Block DETAILED_STATUS with Recommended Action Messages
7.15.2 Transducer block
This section describes error conditions found in the sensor transducer block.
Table 7-12. Transducer Block BLOCK_ERR Messages
Table 7-13. Transducer Block XD_ERR Messages
7.15.3 Analog Input (AI) function block
This section describes error conditions that are supported by the AI Block. Read Table 7-15 to
determine the appropriate corrective action.
Table 7-14. AI BLOCK_ERR Conditions
.
Condition name Recommended action
LOI transducer block error 1. Restart processor
2. Check display connection
3. Call service center
Sensor transducer block error 1. Restart processor
2. Check Rosemount 5400 cable
3. Call service center
Mfg. block integrity error 1. Restart processor
2. Call service center
Non-volatile memory integrity error 1. Restart processor
2. Call service center
ROM integrity error 1. Restart processor
2. Call service center
Condition name and description
Other
Out of Service: The actual mode is out of service
Condition name and description
Electronics failure: An electrical component failed
I/O failure: An I/O failure occurred
Data integrity error: Data stored in the device is no longer valid due to a non-volatile
memory checksum failure, a data verify after write failure, etc.
Algorithm error: The algorithm used in the transducer block produced an error due to
overflow, data reasonableness failure, etc.
Condition
number
Condition name and description
0Other
1Block configuration error: the selected channel carries a measurement
that is incompatible with the engineering units selected in XD_SCALE,
the L_TYPE parameter is not configured, or CHANNEL = zero
3Simulate active: Simulation is enabled and the block is using a
simulated value in its execution
166
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting
November 2014
Service and Troubleshooting
Table 7-15. Troubleshooting the AI Block
7Input failure/process variable has bad status: The hardware is bad, or
a bad status is being simulated
14 Power up
15 Out of service: The actual mode is out of service
Symptom Possible causes Recommended actions
Bad or no level readings
(Read the AI “BLOCK_ERR”
parameter)
BLOCK_ERR reads OUT OF
SERVICE (OOS) 1. AI Block target mode target mode set to OOS.
2. Resource Block OUT OF SERVICE.
BLOCK_ERR reads
CONFIGURATION ERROR 1. Check CHANNEL parameter (see “CHANNEL” on
page 293).
2. Check L_TYPE parameter (see “L_TYPE” on page 293)
3. Check XD_SCALE engineering units. (see “XD_SCALE
and OUT_SCALE” on page 294
BLOCK_ERR reads POWERUP Download Schedule into block. Refer to host for
downloading procedure.
BLOCK_ERR reads BAD INPUT 1. Sensor Transducer Block Out Of Service (OOS)
2. Resource Block Out of Service (OOS)
No BLOCK_ERR but readings
are not correct. If using
Indirect mode, scaling could
be wrong
1. Check XD_SCALE parameter.
2. Check OUT_SCALE parameter.
(see “XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE” on page 294)
OUT parameter status reads
UNCERTAIN and substatus reads
EngUnitRangViolation
Out_ScaleEU_0 and EU_100
settings are incorrect. See “XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE” on page 294.
Mode will not leave OOS Target mode not set Set target mode to something other than OOS.
Configuration error BLOCK_ERR will show the configuration error bit set. The
following are parameters that must be set before the
block is allowed out of OOS:
CHANNEL must be set to a valid value and cannot be left
at initial value of 0.
XD_SCALE.UNITS_INDX must match the units in the
transducer block channel value.
L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square
Root and cannot be left at initial value of 0.
Resource block The actual mode of the Resource block is OOS. See
Resource Block Diagnostics for corrective action.
Schedule Block is not scheduled and therefore cannot execute to
go to Target Mode. Schedule the block to execute.
Process and/or block alarms will
not work Features FEATURES_SEL does not have Alerts enabled. Enable the
Alerts bit.
Notification LIM_NOTIFY is not high enough. Set equal to
MAX_NOTIFY.
Status Options STATUS_OPTS has Propagate Fault Forward bit set. This
should be cleared to cause an alarm to occur.
Value of output does not make
sense Linearization Type L_TYPE must be set to Direct, Indirect, or Indirect Square
Root and cannot be left at the initial value of 0.
Scaling Scaling parameters are set incorrectly:
XD_SCALE.EU0 and EU100 should match that of the
transducer block channel value.
OUT_SCALE.EU0 and EU100 are not set properly.
Cannot set HI_LIMIT,
HI_HI_LIMIT, LO_LIMIT, or
LO_LO_LIMIT Values
Scaling Limit values are outside the OUT_SCALE.EU0 and
OUT_SCALE.EU100 values. Change OUT_SCALE or set
values within range.
Condition
number
Condition name and description
167
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
Section 8 Safety Instrumented Systems
(4-20 mA Only)
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 167
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 168
Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 169
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 169
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 171
Operation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 172
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 174
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 174
Terms and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 174
8.1 Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Failure to follow these installation guidelines could result in death or serious injury.
Make sure only qualified personnel perform the installation.
Use the equipment only as specified in this manual. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating environment of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations specifications.
Before connecting a HART®-based communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make
sure the instruments in the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or
non-incendive field wiring practices.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Use extreme caution when making contact with the leads and terminals.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces (e.g. rod antenna and process seal antenna)
may generate an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under extreme
conditions.
Therefore, when the antenna is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere,
appropriate measures must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
168
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
8.2 Overview
The following section applies to the 4-20 mA Rosemount 5400 Series with QS Prior-Use
Certificate of FMEDA data transmitter used in Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) applications.
The 5400 QS Prior Use option with analog output provides overfill and empty tank protection to
improve the system safety. The transmitter is classified as a Type B device. It contains self-diag-
nostics and is programmed to send its output to either a high or low failure state upon internal
detection of a failure.
An independent third party approval of the FMEDA (detailed performance assessment) was
conducted by SP (Technical Research Institute of Sweden) according to IEC 61508:2010. The
FMEDA is performed to determine failure rates, calculate the Safe Failure Fraction (SFF), and the
average Probability of Failure on Demand (PFDAVG). The hardware assessment is one of the steps
taken to achieve functional safety per IEC 61508 / IEC 61511. It provides the failure rate data
suitable for prior-use assessment.
Note
Refer to the Rosemount 5400 Series FMEDA(1) report for failure rate data, additional details, and
assumptions regarding the failure rate analysis.
8.2.1 Applicable models
Table 8-1 lists the versions of the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter that have been considered
for the hardware assessment, to which this section applies.
Table 8-1. Rosemount 5400 Series QS Option Model Codes
To identify a 5400 QS Prior Use transmitter, verify the option code QS in the model code, on the
label affixed to the outside of the transmitter head.
Any substitution of non-authorized parts or repair, other than exchanging the complete
transmitter head or antenna assembly, may jeopardize safety and is prohibited.
Unauthorized changes to the product are strictly prohibited as they may unintentionally
and unpredictably alter performance and jeopardize safety. Unauthorized changes that
interfere with the integrity of the welds or flanges, such as making additional perforations,
compromise product integrity and safety. Equipment ratings and certifications are no
longer valid on any products that have been damaged or modified without the prior written
permission of Emerson Process Management. Any continued use of product that has been
damaged or modified without the written authorization is at the customer’s sole risk and
expense.
(1) The Rosemount 5400 Series FMEDA report is accessible at www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount/safety/PriorUse.htm.
QS option model codes
1 Model 5401xHxxxxxxxxxxxxQS(1)
(1) Not available with option code C4 or C8.
2 Model 5402xHxxxxxxxxxxxxQS(1)
169
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
8.2.2 Skill level of personnel
It is assumed that the personnel installing, configuring, and operating the system have the
knowledge equal or greater than that of a qualified Instrument Technician familiar with
safety-related systems, process control applications, and general instrument use.
Note
The Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is not safety-rated during maintenance work,
configuration changes, multidrop, loop test, or other activity that affects the Safety Function.
Alternative means should be used to ensure process safety during such activities.
8.3 Functional specifications
The Safety Function is based on the analog output 4-20 mA, used as the safety variable. It is
configured to activate the alarm function if an error occurs or if the measured value goes
beyond the measurement range set by the user.
In the case of the Rosemount 5400 Series, the definition of the Safe State Safety Function is:
The distance measurement is performed as intended inside the safety accuracy limits,
that is with a deviation of < ±2 % of the measuring range.
The safety analog output signal is set outside the normal 4-20 mA range (Low or High
Alarm). The Rosemount standard alarm setting
is: < 3.75 mA or > 21.75 mA.
Only the 4-20 mA output can be used in the Safety Function. The HART protocol can only be
used for setup, calibration, and diagnostic purposes, not for safety critical operation. The
measurement signal used by the logic solver must be the analog 4-20 mA signal proportional to
the level generated.
8.4 Installation
The device should be installed and configured as a level sensing device per manufacturer’s
instructions. The materials must be compatible with process conditions and process fluids. No
special installation is required in addition to what is described in this section, the standard
installation practices outlined in Section 3: Mechanical Installation, and the Rosemount 5400
Series Quick Start Guide (Document No. 00825-0100-4026).
Environmental limits are available in Appendix A: Reference Data.
Note
False echoes within the radar beam from obstructions may lead to a situation where the
Rosemount 5400 Series can no longer be used for safety related functions with the listed failure
rates, SFF, and PFDAVG. However, reduced proof test intervals can help to detect such unwanted
causes.
The loop must be designed so the terminal voltage does not drop below the minimum input
voltage, see values in Table 8-2, when the transmitter output is 21.75 mA. The input voltage Ui
for HART is 16-42.4 Vdc (16-30 Vdc in IS applications, and 20-42.4 Vdc in Explosion-proof /
Flameproof applications).
170
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
The HART loop must be referenced to ground in one point located between the power supply
and the load resistor. Either the negative or the positive pole of the power supply can be ground
referenced, depending on the placement of the load resistor. See Figure 8-1 as an example.
Figure 8-1. Reference Ground when the Load Resistor is Inserted in the Negative Line
Table 8-2. Minimum Input Voltage (Ui) at Different Currents
Hazardous approval
Current
3.75 mA 21.75 mA
Minimum input voltage (Ui)
Non-hazardous Installations and
intrinsically safe installations 16 Vdc 11 Vdc
Explosion-proof / flameproof
installations 20 Vdc 15.5 Vdc
Power supply
Load resistor
Single point loop
ground reference
Rosemount 5400
Series transmitter
Transmitter
housing ground
171
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
8.5 Configuration
Use a HART-compliant master, such as RRM or a Field Communicator, to communicate with and
verify configuration of the Rosemount 5400 Series. A full review of configuration methods is
available in Section 5: Basic Configuration/Start-up. These instructions are applicable to the
5400 QS option with any differences noted.
It is not recommended to use any advanced configuration that is described in Appendix C:
Advanced Configuration. If advanced configuration is required, consult your local Emerson
Process Management representative for guidance.
8.5.1 Damping
User adjusted damping will affect the transmitter’s ability to respond to process changes.
Therefore, the damping values + response time should not exceed the Safety loop requirements.
8.5.2 Alarm and saturation levels
DCS or safety logic solver should be configured to handle both High alarm and Low alarm. It is
also required that the transmitter is configured for High or Low alarm. Table 8-3 identifies the
alarm levels available and their operation values(1).
Table 8-3. Alarm Levels
For instructions on alarm level settings, see “Analog output (HART)” on page 81.
Note
Only the High or Low Alarm Mode can be used for the Safety Function. Do not choose Freeze
Current as an error will not be announced in the current loop.
Note
Alarm Limits should be set with a sufficient margin to Near Zone and Hold Off, or both. See
“Near zone distance” on page 193 and “Hold off setting” on page 250 for more information.
(1) In certain cases, the transmitter does not go into the user defined alarm state. For example, in case of a short circuit, the transmitter goes into
High Alarm state even if Low Alarm has been configured.
Rosemount alarm level
Normal operation
3.75 mA(1)
(1) Transmitter Failure, hardware or software alarm in Low position.
4 mA 20 mA 21.75 mA(2)
(2) Transmitter Failure, hardware or software alarm in High position.
3.9 mA 20.8 mA
low saturation high saturation
172
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
8.5.3 Amplitude threshold
For amplitude thresholds, verify that:
the Amplitude Threshold is at least 50 % greater than the amplitude of disturbances.
For example, if the amplitude of disturbance is 1000 mV, the Amplitude Threshold
should be at least 1500 mV.
the Amplitude Threshold has an amplitude of at least 100 mV
the Amplitude Threshold is set to 20-50 % of the signal amplitude of the product
surface
Amplitude Thresholds should be verified with the measured product in the tank. It is not
recommended to register any false echo areas. For more information on Amplitude Thresholds,
see “Echo tuning” on page 83, “ATC” on page 84, and “Analyzing the measurement signal” on
page 132.
8.5.4 Write protection
A Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter can be protected from unintentional configuration
changes by a password protected function. It is recommended to use write protection
described in “Write protecting a transmitter” on page 152.
8.5.5 Site acceptance
After the installation and configuration, proper operation of the transmitter should be verified.
A site acceptance test is therefore recommended. The proof test outlined in this section can be
used for this. Note that re-verification of the transmitter operation is recommended if the
configuration is changed.
8.6 Operation and maintenance
8.6.1 General
The Rosemount 5400 Series QS option must be tested at regular intervals to confirm that the
overfill and empty tank protection function result in the desired system response. The required
proof test intervals are dependent on the configuration of the transmitter and the process
environment. It is the responsibility of the operator/owner of the system to determine the
sufficient time interval and verify it is followed. See the FMEDA(1) report for additional details or
references.
If the overfill and empty tank protection function cannot be tested by a controlled filling to the
response height, suitable simulation of the level must be used to make the level sensor respond.
The following proof test is recommended. If an error is found in the safety functionality, the
measuring system must be switched out of service and the process held in a safe state by means
of other measures. Proof test results and corrective actions taken must be documented at
www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount/safety.
(1) The Rosemount 5400 Series FMEDA report is accessible at www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount/safety/PriorUse.htm.
173
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
Proof test
This test detects approximately 95 % of the possible Dangerous Undetected (DU) failures of the
transmitter. Note that prior to conducting the test, the echo curve should be inspected to
ensure that no disturbing echoes affecting the measurement performance are present in the
tank.
Required Tools: HART host/communicator and mA meter.
1. Bypass the logic solver or take other appropriate actions to avoid false trip.
2. Disable write protection if the function is enabled.
3. Using Loop Test, enter the mA value representing a high alarm current output and
verify that the analog current reaches that value using the mA meter.
This step tests for compliance voltage problems, such as low loop power supply voltage or
increased wiring resistance.
4. Using Loop Test, enter the mA value representing a low alarm current output and verify
that the analog current reaches that value using the reference meter.
This step tests for possible quiescent current related failures.
5. Perform a two-point calibration check of the transmitter by adjusting the product level
in two points in the measuring range(1). Verify that the current output corresponds to
the level input values using a known reference measurement.
This step verifies that the analog output is correct in the operating range and that the
Primary Variable is properly configured.
6. Enable write protection.
7. Restore the loop to full operation.
8. Remove the bypass from the safety logic solver or otherwise restore normal operation.
9. Document the test result for future reference.
For troubleshooting the transmitter, see Section 7: Service and Troubleshooting.
8.6.2 Inspection
Visual inspection
It is recommended to inspect the antenna for possible build up or clogging.
Special tools
Not required.
Product repair
The Rosemount 5400 Series is repairable by major component replacement. All failures
detected by the transmitter diagnostics or by the proof test must be reported. Feedback can be
submitted electronically at www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount/safety (Contact Us).
(1) For best performance, use the 4-20 mA range points as calibration points.
174
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
8.7 References
8.7.1 Specifications
The Rosemount 5400 Series must be operated in accordance with the functional and
performance specifications provided in Appendix A: Reference Data.
8.7.2 Failure rate data
The FMEDA report includes failure rates and common cause Beta factor estimates. The full
report is accessible at www.emersonprocess.com/rosemount/safety/PriorUse.htm.
8.7.3 Useful lifetime
The established failure rates of electrical components apply within the useful lifetime, which
should be based on experience. According to IEC 61508-2, 7.4.7.4, note 3, the useful lifetime
often lies within a range of 8 to 12 years for transmitters.
8.8 Spare parts
Additional spare parts are available in Appendix A: Reference Data.
8.9 Terms and definitions
FMEDA
Failure Modes, Effects and Diagnostic Analysis
HART
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
PFDAVG
Average Probability of Failure on Demand
SFF
Safe Failure Fraction
SIF
Safety Instrumented Function
SIL
Safety Integrity Level, discrete level (one out of a possible four) for specifying the safety integrity
requirements of the safety functions to be allocated to the E/E/PE safety-related systems, where
Safety Integrity Level 4 has the highest level of safety integrity, and Safety Integrity Level 1 has
the lowest.
175
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
SIS
Safety Instrumented System – Implementation of one or more Safety Instrumented Functions.
A SIS is composed of any combination of sensor(s), logic solver(s), and final element(s).
Type B device
Complex device (using microcontrollers or programmable logic)
176
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Section 8: Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
November 2014
Safety Instrumented Systems (4-20 mA Only)
177
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Appendix A Reference Data
Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 177
Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 189
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 195
Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 200
Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 206
A.1 Functional specifications
A.1.1 General
Field of liquid application
Ideal for liquids and slurries in tanks, vessels, containers, reactor vessels, and underground
tanks. Applications with sticky, viscous, corrosive, condensing, and crystallizing product.
Model 5402, best choice for a broad range of applications and suitable for mounting in
valves and bridles/stilling wells
Model 5401, suitable for some extreme process conditions such as condensing vapors,
product build-up, and heavy turbulence
Field of solids application
Model 5402 with 4 inch cone antenna for a broad range of solids applications.
Measurement principle
Pulsed, free propagating radar. Low frequency (model 5401, 6 GHz) and high frequency (model
5402, 26 GHz). (see “Theory of operation” on page 7 for details)
Microwave output power
< 1 mW
Internal power consumption
< 50 mW in normal operation
Humidity
0 - 100% relative humidity, non-condensing
Start-up time
< 40 s
178
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.1.2 4-20 mA HART® (output option code H)
Output
Two-wire 4–20 mA, HART Revision 5. Digital process variable is superimposed on 4–20 mA
signal, and available to any host that conforms to the HART protocol. The HART signal can be
used in a multidrop mode.
Figure A-1. 4-20 mA HART
Signal wiring
Recommended output cabling is twisted shielded pairs, 18-12 AWG
HART Tri-Loop
By sending the digital HART signal to the optional HART Tri-Loop, it is possible to have up to
three additional 4–20 mA analog signals. See the Rosemount 333 HART Tri-Loop Product Data
Sheet (document number 00813-0100-4754) for additional information.
Figure A-2. Rosemount 333 HART Tri-Loop
3 x 4-20 mA
Rosemount
333 HART
Tri-Loop™
Display (option)
Rosemount 5400
Series transmitter
4-20 mA with HART
Field Communicator
HART
modem
Host / DCS system
(e.g. DeltaV™)
PC with Rosemount Radar
Master or AMS Suite
179
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Smart Wireless THUM™ Adapter
The optional Smart Wireless THUM adapter can be mounted directly on the transmitter or by
using a remote mounting kit. IEC 62591 (WirelessHART®) enables access to multi-variable data
and diagnostics, and adds wireless to almost any measurement point. See the Rosemount Smart
Wireless THUM Adapter Product Data Sheet (document number 00813-0100-4075) and Smart
Wireless THUM Adapter for Rosemount Process Level Transmitter Applications (document
number 00840-0100-4026).
Figure A-3. Smart Wireless THUM Adapter
External power supply
The input voltage UI for HART is 16-42.4 Vdc (16-30 Vdc in IS applications, and 20-42.4 Vdc in
Explosion-proof / flameproof applications).
Figure A-4. External Power Supply
IS Electrical parameters
See “Product Certifications” on page 217.
Signal on alarm (configurable)
High = 21.75 mA (standard Rosemount setting)
Low = 3.75 mA (option code C8)
Namur NE43: High = 22.5 mA (option code C4)
R = Load Resistance (:)
UE = External Power Supply Voltage (Vdc)
UI = Input Voltage (Vdc)
UI
R
UE
180
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Saturation levels
Standard: Low=3.9 mA, High=20.8 mA
Namur NE43: Low = 3.8 mA, High = 20.5 mA
Figure A-5. Alarm Levels
Load limitations
Maximum load resistance (R) is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply
(UE), as described by Figure A-6 to Figure A-8:
Figure A-6. Non-Hazardous Installations
Figure A-7. Intrinsically Safe Installations
Rosemount alarm level
Normal operation
3.75 mA(1)
(1) Transmitter Failure, hardware or software alarm in Low position.
4 mA 20 mA 21.75 mA(2)
(2) Transmitter Failure, hardware or software alarm in High position.
3.9 mA 20.8 mA
low saturation high saturation
10 20
16 30
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
40 50
42.424
586
1387
External Power Supply Voltage UE(V)
Maximum Load Resistance R(:)
Operating
region
10 20
16 30
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
40 50
24
586
847
External Power Supply Voltage UE(V)
Maximum Load Resistance R(:)
Operating
region
181
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Figure A-8. Explosion-Proof/Flameproof Installations
Note
The diagram is only valid if the HART load resistance is at the + side and if the - side is grounded,
otherwise the load resistance value is limited to 435 :.
A.1.3 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus (output option code F)
Output
Figure A-9. FOUNDATION fieldbus System Architecture
Signal wiring
Recommended output cabling is twisted shielded pairs, 18-12 AWG
10 20 30
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
40 50
24 42.4
1148
348
External Power Supply Voltage UE(V)
Maximum Load Resistance R(:)
Operating
region
H1 - Low Speed Field Bus
H2 - High Speed Field Bus
Fieldbus modem
Host / DCS system (e.g. DeltaV) Maintenance
Rosemount 752
Field Signal
Indicator
PC with Rosemount
Radar Master
Field
Communicator
Rosemount
5301
Rosemount
5401 Rosemount
5601
6200 ft (1900 m) max (depending
upon cable characteristics)
182
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
External power supply
The input voltage UI for FOUNDATION fieldbus is 9-32 Vdc (9-30 Vdc in IS applications, 9-17.5 Vdc
in FISCO applications, and 16-32 Vdc in Explosion-proof / flameproof applications).
Quiescent current draw
21 mA
FOUNDATION fieldbus blocks
Resource block, 3 transducer blocks, 6 Analog Input (AI) blocks, Proportional /Integral/Derivate
(PID) block, Input Selector (ISEL) block, Signal Characterizer (SGCR) block, Arithmetic (ARTH)
block, and Output Splitter (OS) block
FOUNDATION fieldbus class (Basic or Link Master)
Link Master (LAS)
FOUNDATION fieldbus block execution time
AI-block: 30 ms
PID-block: 40 ms
ARTH-, ISEL-, OSPL-block: 65 ms
CHAR-block: 75 ms
Conforming FOUNDATION fieldbus
ITK 4.6.1
FOUNDATION fieldbus PlantWeb® Alert Support
Yes
Rosemount 2410 Tank Hub connectivity (output option code U)
Output
The 5400 Level Transmitter communicates with the 2410 Tank Hub via a daisy-chain
connection. The 2410 Tank Hub supports auto-configuration of the FOUNDATION fieldbus based
Tankbus. The hub identifies and auto-addresses the different field devices in the network,
manages communication, and supervises the status of all connected devices.
Primary fieldbus: Rosemount 2410 communicates with a host or a field communication
unit via TRL2 Modbus®, RS485 Modbus, Enraf or HART
Secondary fieldbus: TRL2 Modbus, Enraf, IEC 62591 (WirelessHART)
183
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Figure A-10. Rosemount 2410 Tank Hub Connectivity
Signal wiring
Recommended output cabling is twisted shielded pairs, 18-12 AWG (cable characteristics
specified for FISCO according to IEC 60079-27).
Power supply
The 5400 Level Transmitter and other connected devices are powered by the 2410 Tank Hub.
A.1.4 RS-485 with Modbus communication
(output option code M)
Output
The RS-485 Modbus version communicates by Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, and Level Master
Protocols.
Data Bits: 8 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 or 2 stop bits, and software configured parity
Baud Rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (default), and 19200 bits/s
Address range: 1 to 255 (default device address is 246)
HART communication is used for configuration via HART terminals, or tunneling via the RS-485.
TankMaster
Rosemount 2410
Tank Hub
Field
Communication
Unit
Rosemount 5400
Level Transmitter
Rosemount 644
Temperature Transmitter
with sensor
Tankbus Secondary bus (Non-IS)
Relay OutputsSecondary bus (IS)
Rosemount 2180
Field Bus Modem
Primary bus
Rosemount
2230 Display
184
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Figure A-11. RS-485 with Modbus Communication
External power supply
The input voltage Ui for Modbus is 8-30 Vdc (max. rating).
Power consumption:
< 0.5 W (with HART address = 1)
< 1.2 W (incl. four HART slaves)
Figure A-12. Field Wiring Connections
PC 5400 Setup in
Rosemount Radar
Master
PC 5400 Setup in
Rosemount Radar
Master via Tunneling
RS-232 / RS-485 converter
HART modem
Power
Control
system
Rosemount 5400 Series
Transmitter
475 Field
Communicator
Modbus, Levelmaster Emulation
/ RS-485
MODBUS
POWER
HART
(RS-485)
HART to Modbus Converter
MB
MA
-
-+
+
Ambients > 60 ºC
Use wiring rated
for min 90 ºC
RS-485 Bus
B
A
Power
supply
HART +
HART -
120:
120:
If it is the last transmitter
on the bus, connect the
120 :termination
resistor
MODBUS
(RS-485)
v
erter
MB
MA
-
120:
185
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Signal wiring
Two-wire half duplex RS-485 Modbus. Use shielded twisted pair wiring, preferably with an
impedance of 120 : (typically 24 AWG), in order to comply with EIA-485 standard and EMC
regulations.
Ground (common mode) voltage limit
± 7 V
Bus termination
Standard RS-485 bus termination per EIA-485
A.1.5 Display and configuration
Integral display (option code M1)
5-digit integral display. The process variables listed in “Output variables” on page 186 can be
presented. If more than one variable is chosen, carousel toggling of data is used. The display also
shows diagnostics and error information.
Remote display
Data can be read remotely by using the Rosemount 751 Field Signal Indicator (see Product Data
Sheet, document number 00813-0100-4378) for 4-20 mA / HART, or Rosemount 752 Remote
Indicator for FOUNDATION fieldbus (see Product Data Sheet, document number
00813-0100-4377).
Configuration tools
Emerson Field Communicator (e.g. 375/475 Field Communicator), Rosemount Radar Master
(RRM) software package (included with delivery of transmitter), Emerson AMS® Device
Manager or any other EDDL or enhanced-EDDL host, or DeltaV™ or any other DD (Device
Description) compatible host systems. Certificates are available from all major host system
vendors.
Note
DTM (compliant with version 1.2 of the FDT®/DTM™ specification) supporting configuration in
for instance Yokogawa Fieldmate/PRM, E+H™ FieldCare, and PACTware™.
Note
To communicate using RRM or AMS Device Manager, a HART modem is required. The HART
modem is available as an RS232 or USB version (see Table A-12 on page 215).
Note
The transmitter can be pre-configured by selecting option code C1 (see page 209), and sending
a complete Configuration Data Sheet (CDS). The CDS is available from www.rosemount.com.
186
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Output units
Level and distance: ft, in., m, cm, or mm
Volume: ft3, in.3, US gals, Imp gals, barrels, yd3, m3, or liters
Level rate: ft/s, m/s
Temperature: °F, °C
Output variables
Level, distance, volume, level rate, signal strength, surface/noise margin, internal temperature,
analog output current (not applicable for FOUNDATION fieldbus) and % of range (not applicable for
FOUNDATION fieldbus)
Damping
0-60 s (2 s, default value)
A.1.6 Diagnostics
General
Invalid measurement alerts, configuration error alerts, advanced full/empty tank diagnostics,
hardware/software failures, electronic temperature, online status report
(advisory/warnings/errors), signal quality and signal strength monitoring
Diagnostics Suite (option code D01 or DA1)
Signal Quality Metrics - Diagnostics package that monitors the relations between surface, noise
and threshold. The function can be used to detect abnormal conditions in the process such as
antenna contamination or sudden loss of signal strength. Signal Quality Metrics parameters are
available as Output Variables in Rosemount Radar Master, and can be sent to Distributed Control
System (DCS) to trigger an alarm.
187
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.1.7 Temperature and pressure limits
Ambient temperature
Verify that the operating atmosphere of the transmitter is consistent with the appropriate
hazardous locations certifications, see Table A-1.
LCD display readable in: -4 °F to 158 °F (-20 °C to 70 °C)
Storage temperature
-58 °F to 194 °F (-50 °C to 90 °C)
LCD display: -40 °F to 185 °F (-40 °C to 85 °C)
Process temperature and pressure
The final rating depends on the antenna, the tank seal, and O-rings (if applicable).
See Table A-2 on page 189.
Figure A-13. Rosemount 5402 and 5401 with SST Cone Antenna (Model Code: 2S-8S),
Rosemount 5402 and 5401 with Protective Plate Cone Antenna (Model Code: 2H-8H,
2M-8M, and 2N-8N)
Table A-1. Ambient Temperature
Ambient temperature
IS/Ex ia XP/Ex d Non-hazardous
HART communication -58 °F to 158 °F
(-50 °C to 70 °C)
-40 °F to 158 °F
(-40 °C to 70 °C)
-40 °F to 176 °F
(-40 °C to 80 °C)
FOUNDATION fieldbus -58 °F to 140 °F
(-50 °C to 60 °C)
-40 °F to 140 °F
(-40 °C to 60 °C)
-40 °F to 176 °F
(-40 °C to 80 °C)
FISCO -58 °F to 140 °F
(-50 °C to 60 °C)
N/A -40 °F to 176 °F
(-40 °C to 80 °C)
Modbus communication N/A -40 °F to 158 °F
(-40 °C to 70 °C)
-40 °F to 176 °F
(-40 °C to 80 °C)
Pressure psig (bar)
Flange temperature °F (°C)
-40 (-40) 302 (150)
Cone Antennas
-14 (-1)
232 (16)
Operating range
The final rating may be limited by
flange and O-ring selection.
188
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Figure A-14. Rosemount 5401 with Rod Antenna (Model Code: 1R-4R)
Figure A-15. Rosemount 5402 with Process Seal Antenna (Model Code: 2P-4P)
ASME/ANSI Flange rating
316L SST flanges according to ASME B16.5 Table 2-2.3
EN Flange rating
1.4404 according to EN 1092-1 material group 13E0
JIS Flange rating
316L SST according to JIS B2220 material group 2.3
Pressure psig (bar)
Flange temperature °F (°C)
-40 (-40) 302 (150)
Rod Antennas
-14 (-1)
145 (10)
Operating range
The final rating may be limited by
flange and O-ring selection.
Pressure psig (bar)
Flange temperature °F (°C)
-4
(-20)
302
(150)
Process Seal Antennas
-14 (-1)
120 (8.2)
Operating range
The final rating may be limited by
flange and O-ring selection.
104
(40)
212
(100)
10 (0.69)
90 (6.2)
189
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Flange connection rating
See Table A-3 for the conditions used for flange strength calculations.
A.2 Performance specifications
A.2.1 General
Reference conditions
Ideal metal plate with no disturbing objects.
Temperature: + 68 °F (20 °C)
Pressure: 14-15 psi (960-1060 mbar)
Humidity: 25-75% RH
Instrument accuracy at reference conditions
5402: ± 0.1 in. (± 3 mm)
5401: ± 0.4 in. (± 10 mm
Repeatability
± 0.04 in. (± 1 mm) at 16.4 ft (5 m) distance
Resolution
0.04 in. (1 mm)
Table A-2. Temperature Restrictions due to O-ring Selection
(Not Applicable for 1R-2R or 2P-4P Where no Process O-ring is Present)
Tank seal with different O-ring
materials(1)
(1) Always check the chemical compatibility of the O-ring material with your application.
Min. temperature °F (°C)
in air
Max. temperature °F (°C)
in air
Viton® Fluoroelastomer -4 (-20) 302 (150)
Ethylene Propylene (EPDM) -40 (-40) 302 (150)
Kalrez® 6375 Perfluoroelastomer 5 (-15) 302 (150)
Nitrile Butadiene (NBR) -40 (-40) 230 (110)
Table A-3. Conditions Used for Flange Strength Calculations
Bolting material Gasket Flange material
ASME / ANSI SST SA193 B8M Class 2 Soft (1a) with min. thickness 1.6 mm SA/A182 316L
EN, JIS EN 1515-1/-2 group
13E0, A4-70
Soft (EN 1514-1) with min. thickness
1.6 mm
EN 10222-5-1.4404
190
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Ambient temperature effect
0.05%/10 K in temperature range -40 °F to 176 °F (-40 °C to 80 °C)
Update interval
1 second
A.2.2 Measuring range
Measuring range and minimum dielectric constant
Maximum measuring range from flange: 115 ft (35 m)
The measuring range depends on:
Microwave frequency
Antenna size
The dielectric constant (Hr) of the liquid (min. Hr=1.4)
Process conditions
See Table A-4 and Table A-5 for measuring range and minimum dielectric constant. Due to the
measuring range depending on the application and factors described below, the values are a
guideline for clean liquids. For more information, ask your local Emerson Process Management
representative.
Table A-4. Rosemount 5402, Maximum Recommended Measuring Range, ft (m)
High frequency
antennas
Dielectric constant(1)
(1) A. Oil, gasoline or other hydrocarbons, and petrochemicals (
H
r=1.9-4.0)
In pipes or with ideal surface conditions, for some liquefied gases (
H
r=1.4-4.0)
B. Alcohols, concentrated acids, organic solvents, oil/water mixtures, and acetone (
H
r=4.0-10.0)
C. Conductive liquids, e.g. water based solutions, dilute acids, and alkalis (
H
r>10.0)
A B C A B C A B C
2-in. Cone / Process Seal 33 (10) 49 (15) 66 (20) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 9.8 (3) 20 (6) 33 (10)
3-in. Cone / Process Seal 49 (15) 66 (20) 98 (30) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 13 (4) 30 (9) 39 (12)
4-in. Cone / Process Seal 66 (20) 82 (25) 115 (35) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 23 (7) 39 (12) 49 (15)
191
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.2.3 Beam angle and beam width
Figure A-16. Beam Angle and Beam Width
For a comparison between the beam angle and beam width for the Rosemount 5401 (~6 GHz)
and 5402 (~26 GHz) transmitters with antennas of the same size and type, see Table A-6, Tab le
A-7, and Table A-8.
Table A-5. Rosemount 5401, Maximum Recommended Measuring Range, ft (m)
Low frequency
antennas
Dielectric constant(1)
(1) A. Oil, gasoline or other hydrocarbons, and petrochemicals (
H
r=1.9-4.0)
In pipes or with ideal surface conditions, for some liquefied gases (
H
r=1.4-4.0)
B. Alcohols, concentrated acids, organic solvents, oil/water mixtures, and acetone (
H
r=4.0-10.0)
C. Conductive liquids, e.g. water based solutions, dilute acids, and alkalis (
H
r>10.0)
A B C A B C A B C
3-in. Cone(2)
(2) Pipe installations only. N/A=not applicable.
N/A N/A N/A 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) N/A N/A N/A
4-in. cone / rod(3)
(3) Pipe installations are not allowed with rod antennas.
23 (7) 39 (12) 49 (15) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 13 (4) 26 (8) 39 (12)
6-in. Cone 43 (13) 66 (20) 82 (25) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 20 (6) 33 (10) 46 (14)
8-in. Cone 66 (20) 82 (25) 115 (35) 82 (25) 115 (35) 115 (35) 26 (8) 39 (12) 52 (16)
5401
(low frequency)
16 ft (5 m)
5402
(high frequency)
Distance
33 ft (10 m)
49 ft (15 m)
66 ft (20 m)
Beam angle Beam angle
Beam width
192
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Max level rate
1.6 in./s (40 mm/s) as default, adjustable to 7.1 in./s (180 mm/s)
Table A-6. Beam Angle for the Rosemount 5400 Series
Antenna size Beam angle 5402 Beam angle 5401
2-in. Cone / Process Seal(1)
(1) Only with Rosemount 5402.
19° N/A
3-in. Cone / Process Seal(1) 14° (pipe only)
4-in. Cone / Process Seal(1), Rod(2)
(2) Only with Rosemount 5401.
9° 37°
6-in. Cone N/A 23°
8-in. Cone N/A 17°
Table A-7. Beam Width at Different Distances from Flange for 5402
Distance Antenna
2-in. Cone/Process seal 3-in. Cone/Process seal 4-in. Cone/Process seal
16 ft (5 m) 4.9 ft (1.5 m) 3.3 ft (1.0 m) 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
33 ft (10 m) 9.8 ft (3.0 m) 6.6 ft (2.0 m) 4.9 ft (1.5 m)
49 ft (15 m) 14.8 ft (4.5 m) 9.8 ft (3.0 m) 8.2 ft (2.5 m)
66 ft (20 m) 19.7 ft (6.0 m) 13.1 ft (4.0 m) 9.8 ft (3.0 m)
Table A-8. Beam Width at Different Distances from Flange for 5401
Distance Antenna
4-in. Cone/Rod 6-in. Cone 8-in. Cone
16 ft (5 m) 11.5 ft (3.5 m) 6.6 ft (2.0 m) 4.9 ft (1.5 m)
33 ft (10 m) 23.0 ft (7.0 m) 13.1 ft (4.0 m) 9.8 ft (3.0 m)
49 ft (15 m) 32.8 ft (10 m) 19.7 ft (6.0 m) 14.8 ft (4.5 m)
66 ft (20 m) 42.7 ft (13 m) 26.2 ft (8.0 m) 19.7 ft (6.0 m)
193
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.2.4 Transition zone and near zone
Transition zones are areas where measurements are not recommended. Near zones are areas
where the accuracy is reduced.
Figure A-17. Transition Zone and Near Zone
Transition zone
6 in. (150 mm) from lower end of the antenna
Near zone distance
1.3 ft (0.4 m) from lower end of the antenna
Near zone accuracy
5402: ± 0.6 in. (± 15 mm)
5401: ± 1.2 in. (± 30 mm)
Transition zone
Near zone
194
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.2.5 Environment
Vibration resistance(1)
Aluminum housing: IEC 60770-1 Level 1
SST housing: IACS E10
Electromagnetic compatibility(1)
Emission and immunity: EMC directive 204/108/EC. EN 61326-1:2006(2).
NAMUR recommendations NE21(2).
Transient / built-in lightning protection
IEC 61000-4-5:2001
T1 option: C62.41.2-2002 (IEEE), C37.90.1 (IEEE)
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)
Complies with 97/23/EC article 3.3
Radio approvals(3)(4)
FCC part 15C (1998)(5), R&TTE (EU directive 99/5/EC), and IC (RSS210-5)
(1) The device may also comply with other standards. Consult your local Emerson Process Management representative.
(2) Additional deviations at strong electromagnetic fields (NAMUR NE21) at specific frequencies are less than ± 1.6 in. (40 mm).
(3) Only a limited selection is presented. Contact your local Emerson Process Management representative for more information.
(4) For Japan: “Install device on tanks or pipes made of metal”.
(5) For 5402: “This device is authorized for use in tank-mounted applications, including metal tanks as well as concrete, plastic, glass, and other
non-conductive tanks.” No specific restrictions are stated for the 5401.
195
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.3 Physical specifications
A.3.1 Material selection
Emerson provides a variety of Rosemount product with various product options and
configurations including materials of construction that can be expected to perform well in a
wide range of applications. The Rosemount product information presented is intended as a
guide for the purchaser to make an appropriate selection for the application. It is the purchaser’s
sole responsibility to make a careful analysis of all process parameters (such as all chemical
components, temperature, pressure, flow rate, abrasives, contaminants, etc.), when specifying
product, materials, options and components for the particular application. Emerson Process
Management is not in a position to evaluate or guarantee the compatibility of the process fluid
or other process parameters with the product, options, configuration or materials of
construction selected.
A.3.2 Housing and closure
Product
Rosemount 5400 Series, Non-Contacting Radar
Type
Dual compartment (terminal compartment and the electronics are completely separated). Two
entries for conduit or cable connections. The transmitter housing can be rotated in any
direction.
Electrical connection
½ - 14 NPT for cable glands or conduit entries. Optional: M20 x 1.5 conduit / cable adapter, M12
4-pin male eurofast® connector or A size Mini 4-pin male minifast® connector. Recommended
output cabling is twisted shielded pairs, 18-12 AWG.
Housing material
Polyurethane-covered Aluminum, or Stainless Steel Grade CF8M (ASTM A743)
Ingress protection
Type 4X, IP66, IP67
Factory sealed
Yes
Weight
Aluminum transmitter head: 4.4 lb (2 kg)
Stainless steel transmitter head: 10.8 lb (4.9 kg)
196
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.3.3 Engineered solutions
When standard model codes are not sufficient to fulfill requirements, please consult the factory
to explore possible Engineered Solutions. This is typically, but not exclusively, related to the
choice of wetted materials or the design of a process connection. These Engineered Solutions
are part of the expanded offerings and may be subject to additional delivery lead time. For
ordering, factory will supply a special R-labeled numeric option code that should be added at
the end of the standard model string. See example model string below.
Example Model String: 5402-A-H-1-E5-45-PV-CA-M1C1-R1234
A.3.4 Tank connection and antennas
Tank connection
The tank connection consists of a tank seal, a flange, Tri-Clamp™, or NPT thread.
Certain models of tank connections have a tank connection design with a protective plate of the
same material as the antenna. This is to prevent the 316L / EN1.4404 stainless steel flange from
being exposed to the tank atmosphere. See “Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties”
on page 200.
Flange dimensions
Follows ASME B16.5, JIS B2220, and EN 1092-1 standards. For more information, see “Standard
flanges” on page 205.
Antennas
Cone, Process Seal, and Rod Antenna. Cone antennas can be ordered in different materials.
Extended cone antennas are available in SST 316L.
5402 Cone Antenna
Suitable for stilling-well/bridle installation
Can be recessed in smooth nozzles
Cone extensions are available
Suitable for solids applications (only 4 inch cone antenna)
5402 Process Seal Antenna
Ideal for small tanks and corrosive applications
Suitable for applications with heavy condensation/build-up
5401 Cone Antenna
Suitable for applications with heavy condensation/build-up
Cone extensions are available
5401 Rod Antenna
Suitable for small process connections and corrosive environments
Two versions: all PFA and PFA+SST
197
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Antenna dimensions
Cone antenna: See “Rosemount 5402 and 5401 with SST Cone Antenna (Model Code:
2S-8S)” on page 200 and “Rosemount 5402 and 5401 with Protective Plate Cone
Antenna (Model Code: 2H-8H, 2M-8M, and 2N-8N)” on page 201.
Rod antenna: See “Rosemount 5401 with Rod Antenna (Model Code: 1R-4R)” on
page 202.
Process Seal Antenna: See “Rosemount 5402 with Process Seal Antenna (Model Code:
2P-4P)” on page 203.
Material exposed to tank atmosphere
Cone Antenna
316 / 316 L SST (EN 1.4404) or Alloy 400 (UNS NO4400) or Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276).
Alloy 400 and Alloy C-276 antennas have a protective plate design
PTFE fluoropolymer
O-ring material
Rod Antenna, two versions
All-PFA(1) fluoropolymer
PFA(1) fluoropolymer, 316 / 316 L SST (EN 1.4404) and O-ring material
Process Seal Antenna
PTFE fluoropolymer
(1) PFA is a fluoropolymer with properties similar to PTFE.
198
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Weight
Antennas
Cone Antenna (Model Code 2S-8S, 2H-8H, 2M-8M, 2N-8N): 2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
Process Seal Antenna (Model Code 2P-4P): 4.4 lb (2.0 kg)
Rod Antenna (Model Code 1R-4R): 2.2 lb (1.0 kg)
Process connections(1)
ANSI Flange, 2 in. 150 lb SST (AA): 6.6 lb (3.0 kg)
EN (DIN) Flange, DN50 PN40 SST (HB): 8.8 lb (4.0 kg)
JIS Flange 50A 10K SST (UA): 6.6 lb (3.0 kg)
Bracket mounting (BR): 4.4 lb (2.0 kg)
Thread adapter (RA): 1.1 lb (0.5 kg)
Minimum clearance
No clearance distance needed.
(1) Approximate weights for other 5400 Series process connection sizes than those in this table can be estimated: First of all, find out the weight
of the SST blind flange (slip-on for Process Seal Antennas) that corresponds to the type and size shown in this table. Find out the weight for the
SST blind flange that corresponds to the specific Rosemount 5400 Series flange size which is not represented in this table. The Rosemount
5400 Series flange weight can be estimated by adding the relative weight difference of these SST blind flanges.
199
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Solids applications
Rosemount 5402 Non Contacting Radar level transmitter provides industry leading
measurement capabilities and reliability on solids.
Characteristics include:
4 inch cone antenna (4S, 4H, 4M or 4N)
Measurement accuracy: Application dependent
Measurement independent of dust (may need air purging(1))
Figure A-18. Transition Zone
Table A-9. Measuring Range and Dielectric Constant(2)
(1) An air purging connection can prevent clogging of the antenna in extremely dusty applications, consult factory if unclear.
Minimum
dielectric constant
Maximum
measuring range Transition zone
1.5 33 ft (10 m) 3 ft (1 m)
2.0 66 ft (20 m)
(2) Measuring range may be reduced by steep inclining surfaces and a combination of dust and condensation. For low dielectric constants and /or
long ranges consider the Rosemount 5303 guided wave radar or the Rosemount 5708 3D solids scanner.
Transition
zone
Note
Transition zones are areas where
measurements are not recommended.
The transition zone for Rosemount
5402 in solids mode is 3 ft (1 m).
200
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.4 Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties
A.4.1 Rosemount 5402 and 5401 with SST Cone Antenna
(Model Code: 2S-8S)
7.1 (180)
3.5 (88) 3.6 (92)
s60
B
V°
5.2 (133)
9.4 (240)
A
7.3 (185)
V° Optional
antenna
extension
All dimensions are in inches (mm).
Process connection availability
● Available as standard
❍ Available as special, consult factory
– Not available
Antenna code
Process connection 2S
3S, 4S,
6S, 8S
2 in./DN 50/50A ●❍
3 in./DN 80/80A ●●
4 in./DN 100/100A ●●
6 in./DN 150/150A ●●
8 in./DN 200/200A ●●
Threaded connection --
Bracket mounting ●●
5402 Standard SST Cone
Cone size (in.) A B Antenna code
2 6.5 (165) 2.0 (50) 2S
3 5.9 (150) 2.6 (67) 3S
4 8.8 (225) 3.6 (92) 4S
5401 Standard SST Cone
Cone size (in.) A B Antenna code
3 3.3 (84) 2.6 (67) 3S
4 5.9 (150) 3.6 (92) 4S
6 7.3 (185) 5.5 (140) 6S
8 10.6 (270) 7.4 (188) 8S
5402 and 5401 Extended SST Cone(1)
(1) The extended cone antennas are available in 5-inch step
increments from 10 to 50 inches. Consult your local
Emerson Process Management representative for more
information. Expect long lead times for other sizes than
the 20 in. (500 mm) version.
Max. nozzle height AOption code
20 (500) 20.4 (518) S3
5402 Extended SST Cone
Cone size (inches) V°
2 90°
3 90°
4 90°
5401 Extended SST Cone
Cone size (inches) V°
3 90°
4 135°
6 135°
8 90°
201
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.4.2 Rosemount 5402 and 5401 with Protective Plate Cone
Antenna (Model Code: 2H-8H, 2M-8M, and 2N-8N)
7.1 (180)
3.5 (88) 3.6 (92)
s60
B
5.2 (133)
9.4 (240)
A
7.3 (185)
All dimensions are in inches (mm).
Protective plate
5402 Cone Antenna with Protective Plate
Cone size (in.) A B Antenna code
2 5.9 (150) 2.0 (50) 2H, 2M, 2N
3 6.9 (175) 2.6 (67) 3H, 3M, 3N
4 9.8 (250) 3.6 (92) 4H, 4M, 4N
Process connection availability
● Available as standard
❍ Available as special, consult factory
– Not available
Antenna code
Process connection
2H, 2M,
2N
3H, 3M,
3N
4H, 4M,
4N
6H, 6M,
6N
8H, 8M,
8N
2 in. / DN 50 / 50A ●❍❍❍❍
3 in. / DN 80 / 80A ❍●❍❍❍
4 in. / DN 100 / 100A ❍❍●❍❍
6 in. / DN 150 / 150A ❍❍❍●❍
8 in. / DN 200 / 200A ❍❍❍❍●
Threaded connection -----
Bracket Mounting -----
5401 Cone Antenna with Protective Plate
Cone size (in.) A B Antenna code
3 3.3 (84) 2.6 (67) 3H, 3M, 3N
4 5.9 (150) 3.6 (92) 4H, 4M, 4N
6 7.3 (185) 5.5 (140) 6H, 6M, 6N
8 10.6 (270) 7.4 (188) 8H, 8M, 8N
202
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.4.3 Rosemount 5401 with Rod Antenna (Model Code: 1R-4R)
7.1 (180)
3.5 (88) 3.6 (92)
s60
5.2 (133)
9.4 (240)
7.3 (185)
All dimensions are in inches (mm).
Rod Antenna
with protective
plate (1R, 2R)
Rod Antenna
without
protective plate
(3R, 4R)
B
A
1.5 (38)
Tri-Clamp connections
(AT, BT, CT) are available
for rod antennas without
protective plate (3R, 4R)
Rod A B(1)
(1) The active part of the antenna must protrude into the tank. B is the
maximum nozzle height.
Antenna code
Short 14.4 (365) 4 (100) 1R, 3R
Long 20.3 (515) 10 (250) 2R, 4R
Process connection availability
● Available as standard
❍ Available as special, consult factory
– Not available
Process connection
Antenna code
1R, 2R 3R, 4R
2 in. / DN 50 / 50A ●●
3 in. / DN 80 / 80A ●●
4 in. / DN 100 / 100A ●●
6 in. / DN 150 / 150A ❍●
8 in. / DN 200 / 200A ❍●
2 in. Tri-Clamp ❍●
3 in. Tri-Clamp ❍●
4 in. Tri-Clamp ❍●
Threaded connection -●
Bracket mounting -●
Threaded connection
(RA) is available for rod
antennas without
protective plate (3R, 4R)
203
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.4.4 Rosemount 5402 with Process Seal Antenna
(Model Code: 2P-4P)
All dimensions are in inches (mm).
7.1 (180)
3.5 (88) 3.6 (92)
s60
A
B
C
5.2 (133)
7.3 (185)
1.1 (27)
Process seal size
(in.) A B C Antenna
code
2 1.8 (46) 14.2 (360) 0.9 (22) 2P
3 2.8 (72) 17.3 (440) 1.4 (35) 3P
4 3.8 (97) 18.9 (480) 1.9 (48) 4P
Process connection availability
● Available as standard
❍ Available as special, consult factory
– Not available
Antenna code
Process connection 2P 3P 4P
2 in. / DN 50 / 50A ●--
3 in. / DN 80 / 80A -●-
4 in. / DN 100 / 100A --●
6 in. / DN 150 / 150A ---
8 in. / DN 200 / 200A ---
Threaded connection ---
Bracket mounting ---
204
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.4.5 Bracket mounting (Model Code: BR)
Bracket mounting is available for the Rosemount 5401 and 5402 with SST Cone Antenna (2S-8S)
and Rosemount 5401 with Rod Antenna (3R-4R).
All dimensions are in inches (mm).
Pipe mounting
(vertical pipe)
Pipe mounting
(horizontal pipe)
Pipe diameter max
2.5 inches (64 mm)
5.2 (133)
Wall mounting Hole pattern wall mounting
0.3 (7)
2.2 (57)
0.8 (20)
2.8 (20)
205
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.4.6 Process connections
Standard flanges
Figure A-19. Cone and Rod Antennas (Model Code: 2S-8S and 1R-4R)
Figure A-20. Cone Antennas with Protective Plate (Model Code: 2H-8H, 2M-8M, and
2N-8N)
Figure A-21. Process Seal Antennas
Designation Mating standard Face style(1)
(1) Face gasket surface is serrated per mating standard.
Face surface finish Material
ANSI ASME B16.5 0.06 in. raised face Ra = 125-250 ì in 316 / 316L
EN (DIN) EN 1092-1 2 mm raised face (Type B1) Ra = 3.2-12.5 ì m EN 1.4404
JIS JIS B2220 2 mm raised face Ra = 3.2-6.3 ì m EN 1.4404
Designation Mating standard Face style(1)
(1) Face gasket surface is serrated per mating standard.
Face surface finish Material
ANSI ASME B16.5 0.06 in. raised face Ra = 125-250 ì in 316 / 316L
EN (DIN) EN 1092-1 Flat face (Type A) Ra = 3.2-12.5 ì m EN 1.4404
JIS JIS B2220 2 mm raised face Ra = 3.2-6.3 ì m EN 1.4404
Designation Standard Style Material
ANSI ASME B16.5 Slip-on 316 / 316L
EN (DIN) EN 1092-1 Slip-on (Type 01) EN 1.4404
JIS JIS B2220 Slip-on plate (SOP) EN 1.4404
206
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
A.5 Ordering information
Specification and selection of product materials, options, or components must be made by the
purchaser of the equipment. See page 195 for more information on Material Selection.
Table A-10. 5402 High Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model Product description
5402 High frequency version (~26 GHz) ★
Housing material
APolyurethane-covered Aluminum ★
SStainless Steel (SST), Grade CF8M (ASTM A743)
Signal output
H4-20 mA with HART communication (HART Revision 5, see page 178 for details) ★
F FOUNDATION fieldbus (see page 181 for details) ★
MRS-485 with Modbus communication (see page 183 for details) ★
URosemount 2410 tank hub connectivity (consult factory for details)
Conduit/cable threads
1 ½ in. - 14 NPT ★
2 M20 x 1.5 adapter ★
E(1) M12, 4-pin, male connector (eurofast®)★
M(1) A size Mini, 4-pin, male connector (minifast®)★
4 2 pcs M20 x 1.5 adapters (consult factory for details)
G(2)(3) 2 pcs metal cable glands (½-14 NPT), (consult factory for details)
Product certifications
NA No product certificates ★
E1(1) ATEX Flameproof ★
I1 ATEX Intrinsic safety ★
IA(4) ATEX FISCO Intrinsic safety ★
E5(1) FM Explosion-proof ★
I5 FM Intrinsic safety and non-incendive ★
IE(4) FM FISCO Intrinsic safety ★
E6(1) CSA Explosion-proof ★
I6 CSA Intrinsic safety ★
IF(4) CSA FISCO Intrinsic safety ★
E7(1) IECEx Flameproof ★
I7 IECEx Intrinsic safety ★
207
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
IG(4) IECEx FISCO Intrinsic safety ★
E2 INMETRO Flameproof
EM Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Flameproof (consult factory for details)
I2 INMETRO Intrinsic safety
IB INMETRO FISCO Intrinsic safety
E3(1) NEPSI Flameproof
I3 NEPSI Intrinsic safety
IC NEPSI FISCO Intrinsic safety
IM Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Intrinsic Safety (consult factory for details)
E4(5) TIIS Flameproof
N1(1) ATEX Type n (consult factory for details)
N7(1) IECEx Type n (consult factory for details)
Antenna - size and material (for process connection availability,
reference to “Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties” on page 200)
Cone antennas
2S 2 in. DN 50, 316L SST (EN 1.4404) ★
3S 3 in. DN 80, 316L SST (EN 1.4404) ★
4S 4 in. DN 100, 316L SST (EN 1.4404) ★
2H 2 in. DN 50, Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276) with protective plate
3H 3 in. DN 80, Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276) with protective plate
4H 4 in. DN 100, Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276) with protective plate
2M 2 in. DN 50, Alloy 400 (UNS N04400) with protective plate
3M 3 in. DN 80, Alloy 400 (UNS N04400) with protective plate
4M 4 in. DN 100, Alloy 400 (UNS N04400) with protective plate
2N 2 in. DN 50, 316L SST (EN 1.4404), with protective plate. Complies with guidelines in NACE® MR0175/ISO
15156 and NACE MR0103.
3N 3 in. DN 80, 316L SST (EN 1.4404), with protective plate. Complies with guidelines in NACE MR0175/ISO
15156 and NACE MR0103.
4N 4 in. DN 100, 316L SST (EN 1.4404), with protective plate. Complies with guidelines in NACE MR0175/ISO
15156 and NACE MR0103.
Process seal antennas
2P 2 in. (DN50), PTFE (requires tank sealing code NA)
3P 3 in. (DN80), PTFE (requires tank sealing code NA)
4P 4 in. (DN100), PTFE (requires tank sealing code NA)
Other antennas
XX Customer specific
Table A-10. 5402 High Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
208
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Tank sealing, o-ring material
PV Viton Fluoroelastomer ★
PK Kalrez 6375 Perfluoroelastomer ★
PE Ethylene Propylene (EPDM) ★
PB Nitrile Butadiene (NBR) ★
NA None(6) ★
Process connection and material (for antenna availability,
reference to “Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties” on page 200)
ASME/ANSI flanges (316/316L SST)(7)
AA 2 inch, 150 lb ★
AB 2 inch, 300 lb ★
BA 3 inch, 150 lb ★
BB 3 inch, 300 lb ★
CA 4 inch, 150 lb ★
CB 4 inch, 300 lb ★
DA 6 inch, 150 lb ★
EA 8 inch, 150 lb ★
EN (DIN) flanges (EN 1.4404 SST)(7)
HB DN 50 PN 40 ★
IB DN 80 PN 40 ★
JA DN 100 PN 16 ★
JB DN 100 PN 40 ★
KA DN 150 PN 16 ★
LA DN 200 PN 16 ★
JIS flanges (EN 1.4404 SST)(7)
UA 50A 10K ★
VA 80A 10K ★
XA 100A 10K ★
YA 150A 10K ★
ZA 200A 10K ★
Other
BR(8) Bracket mounting, 316L / EN 1.4404 SST
XX Customer specific
Options
M1 Integral digital display ★
Table A-10. 5402 High Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
209
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
GC Transparent meter glass protection cover made of PTFE / FEP ★
T1 Transient protection terminal block (standard with FISCO options) ★
Factory configuration
C1 Factory configuration (Configuration Data Sheet required with order, available at www.rosemount.com)★
Alarm limit configuration
C4 NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm ★
C8(9) Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels) ★
Overfill
U1(10) WHG Overfill approval ★
Special certifications
Q4 Calibration Data Certificate ★
Q8(11) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1 ★
N2(12) Certificate of compliance with guidelines in NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 and NACE MR0103
QG GOST Primary Verification Certificate
Safety certifications
QS(10) Prior use certificate of FMEDA data
Shipboard approvals(13)
SBS American Bureau of Shipping Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SLL Lloyd's Register Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SBV Bureau Veritas Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SRS Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SGL Germanischer Lloyd Type Approval (consult factory for details)
Special procedures
P1(8) Hydrostatic testing ★
Antenna extension
S3(14) Cone Antenna extension in 316 / 316L / EN 1.4404 SST. To be used if there are irregularities in the nozzle.
Fits nozzles up to 20 in. (500 mm).
Diagnostics functionality (see page 186 for more information)
D01 FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite (includes Signal Quality Metrics diagnostics)
(consult factory for details)
DA1 HART Diagnostics Suite (includes Signal Quality Metrics diagnostics) (consult factory for details)
Table A-10. 5402 High Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
210
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Solids applications
SM1 Solids Measurement mode (see page 199)★
Engineered solutions (see page 196)
Rxxxx Engineered Solutions beyond standard model codes (consult factory for details)
Typical model number: 5402 A H 1 E5 4S PV CA - M1 C1
(1) Options E (eurofast) and M (minifast) are not available with explosion-proof, flameproof, or type n approvals.
(2) Min temperature -20 °C (-4 °F).
(3) Not available with explosion-proof, flameproof, or type n approvals.
(4) Requires FOUNDATION fieldbus signal output (Ui parameter listed in “Product Certifications” on page 217).
(5) G ½ in. SST cable gland is included in delivery.
(6) Requires Process Seal Antenna (2P-4P). O-rings are not wetted.
(7) See “Process connections” on page 205 for Face style.
(8) Bracket mounting (BR) is not available with hydrostatic testing (P1).
(9) The standard alarm setting is high.
(10) Only available with 4-20 mA HART signal output.
(11) Certificate includes all pressure retaining wetted parts.
(12) Requires Protective Plate Cone Antennas (2H-4H, 2M-4M, 2N-4N) or Process Seal Antennas (2P-4P).
(13) Only for stainless steel housing material (code S). Not available with Modbus signal output (code M). Contact an Emerson Process Management representative for
additional information.
(14) Requires a SST Cone Antenna (2S-4S).
Table A-10. 5402 High Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
211
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Table A-11. 5401 Low Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
Model Product description
5401 Low frequency version (~6 GHz) ★
Housing material
APolyurethane-covered Aluminum ★
SStainless Steel (SST), Grade CF8M (ASTM A743)
Signal output
H4-20 mA with HART communication (HART Revision 5, see page 178 for details) ★
F FOUNDATION fieldbus (see page 181 for details) ★
MRS-485 with Modbus communication (see page 183 for details) ★
URosemount 2410 tank hub connectivity (consult factory for details)
Conduit/cable threads
1 ½ in. - 14 NPT ★
2 M20 x 1.5 adapter ★
E(1) M12, 4-pin, male connector (eurofast)
M(1) A size Mini, 4-pin, male connector (minifast)
Product certifications
NA No product certificates ★
E1(1) ATEX Flameproof ★
I1 ATEX Intrinsic safety ★
IA(2) ATEX FISCO Intrinsic safety ★
E5(1) FM Explosion-proof ★
I5 FM Intrinsic safety and non-incendive ★
IE(2) FM FISCO Intrinsic safety ★
E6(1) CSA Explosion-proof ★
I6 CSA Intrinsic safety ★
IF(2) CSA FISCO Intrinsic safety ★
E7(1) IECEx Flameproof ★
I7 IECEx Intrinsic safety ★
IG(2) IECEx FISCO Intrinsic safety ★
E2 INMETRO Flameproof
I2 INMETRO Intrinsic safety
IB INMETRO FISCO Intrinsic safety
E3(1) NEPSI Flameproof
212
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
EM Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Flameproof (consult factory for details)
I3 NEPSI Intrinsic safety
IC NEPSI FISCO Intrinsic safety
IM Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) Intrinsic Safety (consult factory for details)
E4(3) TIIS Flameproof
N1(1) ATEX Type n (consult factory for details)
N7(1) IECEx Type n (consult factory for details)
Antenna - size and material (for process connection availability,
reference to “Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties” on page 200)
Cone antennas
3S 3 in. DN 80, 316L SST (EN 1.4404) ★
4S 4 in. DN 100, 316L SST (EN 1.4404) ★
6S 6 in. DN 150, 316L SST (EN 1.4404) ★
8S 8 in. DN 200, 316L SST (EN 1.4404) ★
3H 3 in. DN 80, Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276) with protective plate, pipe installations only
4H 4 in. DN 100, Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276) with protective plate
6H 6 in. DN 150, Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276) with protective plate
8H 8 in. DN 200, Alloy C-276 (UNS N10276) with protective plate
3M 3 in. DN 80, Alloy 400 (UNS N04400) with protective plate, pipe installations only
4M 4 in. DN 100, Alloy 400 (UNS N04400) with protective plate
6M 6 in. DN 150, Alloy 400 (UNS N04400) with protective plate
8M 8 in. DN 200, Alloy 400 (UNS N04400) with protective plate
3N 3 in. DN 80, 316L SST (EN 1.4404), with protective plate, pipe installations only. Complies with guidelines
in NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 and NACE MR0103.
4N 4 in. DN 100, 316L SST (EN 1.4404), with protective plate. Complies with guidelines in NACE MR0175/ISO
15156 and NACE MR0103.
6N 6 in. DN 150, 316L SST (EN 1.4404), with protective plate. Complies with guidelines in NACE MR0175/ISO
15156 and NACE MR0103.
8N 8 in. DN 200, 316L SST (EN 1.4404), with protective plate. Complies with guidelines in NACE MR0175/ISO
15156 and NACE MR0103.
Rod antennas
1R(4)(5) Short version, all-PFA, with protective plate, max. nozzle height 4 in. (100 mm), free propagation only
2R(4)(5) Long version, all-PFA, with protective plate, max. nozzle height 10 in. (250 mm), free propagation only
3R(4) Short version, SST+PFA, max. nozzle height 4 in. (100 mm), free propagation only
4R(4) Long version, SST+PFA, max. nozzle height 10 in. (250 mm), free propagation only
Other antennas
XX Customer specific
Table A-11. 5401 Low Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
213
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Tank sealing, o-ring material
PV Viton Fluoroelastomer ★
PK Kalrez 6375 Perfluoroelastomer ★
PE Ethylene Propylene (EPDM) ★
PB Nitrile Butadiene (NBR) ★
PD(4) All-PFA Rod Antennas (O-rings are not wetted) ★
Process connection and material (for antenna availability,
reference to “Dimensional drawings and mechanical properties” on page 200)
ASME/ANSI flanges (316/316L SST)(6)
AA 2 in. 150 lb ★
AB 2 in. 300 lb ★
BA 3 in. 150 lb ★
BB 3 in. 300 lb ★
CA 4 in. 150 lb ★
CB 4 in. 300 lb ★
DA 6 in. 150 lb ★
EA 8 in. 150 lb ★
EN (DIN) flanges (EN 1.4404 SST)(6)
HB DN 50 PN 40 ★
IB DN 80 PN 40 ★
JA DN 100 PN 16 ★
JB DN 100 PN 40 ★
KA DN 150 PN 16 ★
LA DN 200 PN 16 ★
JIS flanges (EN 1.4404 SST)(6)
UA 50A 10K ★
VA 80A 10K ★
XA 100A 10K ★
YA 150A 10K ★
ZA 200A 10K ★
Tri-Clamp connection (316/316L)
AT(7) 2 in. Tri-Clamp
BT(7) 3 in. Tri-Clamp
CT(7) 4 in. Tri-Clamp
Threaded (316L / EN 1.4404 SST)
Table A-11. 5401 Low Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
214
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
RA(8) 1.5-in. NPT
Other
BR(8) Bracket mounting, 316L / EN 1.4404 SST
XX Customer specific
Options
M1 Integral digital display ★
T1 Transient protection terminal block (standard with FISCO options) ★
GC Transparent meter glass protection cover made of PTFE/FEP
Factory configuration
C1 Factory configuration (Configuration Data Sheet required with order, available at www.rosemount.com)★
Alarm limit configuration
C4 NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm ★
C8(9) Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels) ★
Overfill
U1(10) WHG Overfill approval ★
Special certifications
Q4 Calibration Data Certificate ★
Q8(10) Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1 ★
N2(11) Certificate of compliance with guidelines in NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 and NACE MR0103
QG GOST Primary Verification Certificate
Safety certifications
QS(12) Prior use certificate of FMEDA data
Shipboard approvals(13)
SBS American Bureau of Shipping Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SLL Lloyd's Register Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SBV Bureau Veritas Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SRS Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Type Approval (consult factory for details)
SGL Germanischer Lloyd Type Approval (consult factory for details)
Special procedures
P1(8) Hydrostatic testing ★
Antenna extension
S3(14) Extended Cone Antenna in 316 / 316L / EN 1.4404 SST. Maximum recommended nozzle height is 20 in.
(500 mm).
Table A-11. 5401 Low Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
215
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
Diagnostics functionality (see page 186 for more information)
D01 FOUNDATION fieldbus Diagnostics Suite (includes Signal Quality Metrics diagnostics)
(consult factory for details)
DA1 HART Diagnostics Suite (includes Signal Quality Metrics diagnostics) (consult factory for details)
Engineered solutions (see page 196)
Rxxxx Engineered Solutions beyond standard model codes (consult factory for details)
Typical model number: 5401 A H 1 NA 4S PV CA - M1 C1
(1) Options E (eurofast) and M (minifast) are not available with explosion-proof, flameproof, or type n approvals.
(2) Requires FOUNDATION fieldbus signal output (Ui parameter listed in “Product Certifications” on page 217).
(3) G ½ in. SST cable gland is included in delivery.
(4) PFA is a fluoropolymer with properties similar to PTFE.
(5) All-PFA Rod Antennas (1R or 2R) require all-PFA tank seal (PD).
(6) See “Process connections” on page 205 for Face style.
(7) Only available with Rod Antenna (3R and 4R).
(8) Certain process connections are not available with hydrostatic testing (P1).
(9) The standard alarm setting is high.
(10) Certificate includes all pressure retaining wetted parts.
(11) Requires Protective Plate Cone Antennas (3H-8H, 3M-8M, 3N-8N) or Rod Antennas (1R-4R).
(12) Only available with 4-20 mA HART signal output.
(13) Only for stainless steel housing material (code S). Not available with Modbus signal output (code M). Contact an Emerson Process Management representative for
additional information.
(14) Requires a SST Cone Antenna (4S-8S).
Table A-12. Accessories
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
HART modem and cables
03300-7004-0001 MACTek Viator HART modem and cables (RS232 connection) ★
03300-7004-0002 MACTek Viator HART modem and cables (USB connection) ★
Table A-11. 5401 Low Frequency Radar Level Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred options (★) represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings
are subject to additional delivery lead time.
216
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix A: Reference data
November 2014
Reference Data
217
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
Appendix B Product Certifications
Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 217
European Directive information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 219
FCC and ICC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 219
Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 219
Hazardous locations certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 220
Approval drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 230
B.1 Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety
of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is
indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing
an operation preceded by this symbol.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Verify that the operating environment of the transmitter is consistent with the
appropriate hazardous locations specifications.
To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, disconnect power
before servicing.
Before connecting a HART®-, FOUNDATION™ fieldbus-, or Modbus®-based
communicator in an explosive atmosphere, make sure the instruments in the loop are
installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.
To avoid process leaks, only use O-rings designed to seal with the corresponding
flange adapter.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads
can cause electrical shock.
Make sure the main power to the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter is off and the
lines to any other external power source are disconnected or not powered while wiring
the transmitter.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces.
Antennas with non-conducting surfaces (e.g. rod antenna and process seal antenna)
may generate an ignition-capable level of electrostatic charge under extreme
conditions.
Therefore, when the antenna is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere,
appropriate measures must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
218
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
Failure to follow safe installation and service guidelines could result in death or
serious injury.
Make sure the transmitter is installed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
applicable code of practice.
Use the equipment only as specified in this manual. Failure to do so may impair the
protection provided by the equipment.
Do not perform any services other than those contained in this manual unless you are
qualified.
Any substitution of non-recognized spare parts may jeopardize safety.
Unauthorized changes to the product are strictly prohibited as they may unintentionally
and unpredictably alter performance and jeopardize safety. Unauthorized changes that
interfere with the integrity of the welds or flanges, such as making additional perforations,
compromise product integrity and safety. Equipment ratings and certifications are no
longer valid on any products that have been damaged or modified without the prior written
permission of Emerson Process Management. Any continued use of product that has been
damaged or modified without prior written authorization is at the customer's sole risk and
expense.
219
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.2 European Directive information
The EC declaration of conformity for all applicable European directives for this product can be
found on the Rosemount website at www.rosemount.com.
A hard copy may be obtained by contacting our local sales representative.
B.3 FCC and ICC
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
B.4 Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS)(1)
The Rosemount 5400 Series has been evaluated by a third party, the SP (Technical Research
Institute of Sweden), against hardware requirements according to IEC 61508. With a FMEDA
(Failure Modes, Effects and Diagnostics Analysis) report with a Safe Failure Fraction (SFF) above
80%, 5400 is suitable in SIS according to the Prior Use methodology. For more information, go
to: http://www.rosemount.com/safety. To order the certificate of FMEDA data, use option code
QS.
Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Rosemount Inc.
may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
Les changements ou les modifications apportés à l'équipement qui n'est pas expressément
approuvé par Rosemount Inc pourraient annuler l'autorité de l'utilisateur à utiliser cet
équipement.
(1) Not available for solids applications.
220
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.5 Hazardous locations certifications
Other temperature restrictions may apply beside the ones mentioned in the following sections.
For more information, see “Reference Data” on page 177.
B.5.1 North-American certifications
Factory Mutual (FM) approvals
The Rosemount 5400 Series Non-Contacting Radar Level Transmitter that has the following
labels attached has been certified to comply with the requirements of the approval agencies
noted.
Project ID: 3020497
Specific Conditions of Use:
1. WARNING – Potential Electrostatic Charging Hazard – The enclosure is constructed
from a non-metallic material. To prevent the risk of electrostatic sparking the plastic
surface should only be cleaned with a damp cloth.
2. WARNING – The apparatus enclosure contains aluminum and is considered to
constitute a potential risk of ignition by impact or friction. Care must be taken into
account during installation and use to prevent impact or friction.
E5 Explosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, and D;
Dust ignition proof for Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, and G; with intrinsically safe
connections to Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D, E, F, and G.
Temp. Code T4
Ambient temperature limits: -50 °C to +70 °C(1).
Seal not required.
Approval valid for HART, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and Modbus options.
I5, IE Intrinsically Safe for Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G,
Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T4 when installed per control drawing: 9150079-905.
Non-incendive for Class I, II, Div.2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G suitable for Class II, III.
4-20 mA/HART model: Ui = 30 Vdc, Ii = 130 mA, Pi = 1.0 W, Ci = 7.26 nF, Li = 0 PH
FOUNDATION fieldbus model: Ui = 30 Vdc, Ii = 300 mA, Pi = 1.3 W, Ci = 0 nF, Li = 0 H
FISCO model: Ui = 17.5 Vdc, Ii = 380 mA, Pi = 5.32 W, Ci = Li = 0
Temp. Code T4
Ambient temperature limits: -50 °C to +70 °C(1)
Approval valid for HART, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and FISCO options.
(1) +60 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus or FISCO option.
221
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.5.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Approvals
When bearing the “Dual Seal” marking, this product meets the Dual Seal Requirements of
ANSI/ISA 12.27.01-2003.
Cert. No.: 1514653
E6 Explosion-proof with internal Intrinsically safe circuits [Exia] Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C,
and D;
Temp. Code T4.
Class II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups E, F, and G;
Class III, Div. 1
Ambient temperature limits -50 °C to +70 °C(1).
Approval valid for HART, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and Modbus options.
I6, IF Intrinsically safe Exia.
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, and D.
Temp. Code T4.
4-20 mA/HART model: Ui = 30 Vdc, Ii = 130 mA, Pi = 1.0 W, Ci = 7.26 nF, Li = 0 H.
FOUNDATION fieldbus model: Ui = 30 Vdc, Ii = 300 mA, Pi = 1.3 W, Ci = 0 nF, Li = 0 H.
FISCO model: Ui = 17.5 Vdc, Ii = 380 mA, Pi = 5.32 W, Ci = Li = 0.
Installation drawing: 9150079-906.
Ambient temperature limits: -50 °C to +70 °C(1).
Approval valid for HART, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and FISCO options.
(1) +60 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus or FISCO option.
222
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.5.3 European certifications
ATEX Approvals
Nemko 04ATEX1073X
Specific Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. The intrinsically safe circuits do not withstand the 500V AC test as specified in
EN 60079-11clause 6.4.13.
2. “Potential ignition hazards by impact or friction need to be considered according to
EN 60079-0:2012 clause 8.3 (for EPL Ga and EPL Gb) and clause 8.4 (for EPL Da and EPL
Db), when the transmitter enclosure and antennas exposed to the exterior atmosphere
of the tank, is made with light metals containing aluminum or titanium, The end user
shall determine the suitability with regard to avoid hazards from impact and friction.”
3. The antennas for type 5400, are non-conducting and the area of the non-conducting
part exceeds the maximum permissible areas for Group IIC and according to
EN 60079-0:2012 clause 7.4: 20 cm2 for EPL Gb and 4 cm2 for EPL Ga. Therefore, when
the antenna is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere, appropriate measures must
be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
4. The Ex ia version of model 5400 may be supplied by an Ex ib certified safety barrier. The
whole circuit shall then be regarded type Ex ib.
The preferred type Ex ia or Ex ib shall be indicated on the marking label as specified in
the instructions for the transmitter. The antenna part, located in the process vessel, is
classified EPL Ga and electrically separated from the Ex ia or ib circuit.
5. ½” NPT threads need to be sealed for dust and water ingress protection, IP 66, IP 67 or
‘Ex t’, EPL Da or Db is required.
E1 Flameproof:
II 1/2 G Ex d ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
II 1D Ex ta IIIC T79°C(2) Da (-40 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
Um = 250 V
Approval valid for HART, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and Modbus options.
I1, IA Intrinsically safe:
II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga or II 1/2 G Ex ib IIC T4 Ga/Gb (-40 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
II 1 D Ex ta IIIC T79°C(2) Da (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
4-20 mA / HART model: Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=130 mA, Pi=1.0 W, Ci=7.26 nF, Li=0 H.
FOUNDATION fieldbus model: Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=300 mA, Pi=1.5 W, Ci=4.95 nF, Li=0 H.
FISCO model: Ui=17.5 Vdc, Ii=380 mA, Pi=5.32 W, Ci=4.95 nF, Li<1 ì H.
Installation drawing: 9150079-907.
Approval valid for HART, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and FISCO options.
(1) +60 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus or FISCO option.
(2) +69 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus or FISCO option.
0575
223
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
Nemko 10ATEX1072
N1 Type n:
II 3G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
II 3G Ex nL IIC T4 Gc (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
HART 4-20 mA(2)
Maximum input voltage Ui: 42.4 V, Maximum input current Ii: 23 mA
Maximum input power Pi: 1.0 W, Maximum internal capacitance Ci: 7.25 nF
Maximum internal inductance Li: 0 H
FOUNDATION fieldbus(2)
Maximum input voltage Ui: 32 V, Maximum input current Ii: 21 mA
Maximum input power Pi: 0.7 W, Maximum internal capacitance Ci: 4.95 nF
Maximum internal inductance Li: 0 H
Approval valid for HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus options.
Installation drawing: 9240031-958
(1) +60 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus or FISCO option.
(2) Valid for Ex nL.
224
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.5.4 IECEx Approval
IECEx NEM 06.0001X
Specific Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. The intrinsically safe circuits do not withstand the 500V AC test as specified in IEC
60079-11 clause 6.4.13.
2. “Potential ignition hazards by impact or friction need to be considered according to IEC
60079-0:2011 clause 8.3 (for EPL Ga and EPL Gb) and clause 8.4 (for EPL Da and EPL Db),
when the transmitter enclosure and antennas exposed to the exterior atmosphere of
the tank, is made with light metals containing aluminum or titanium, The end user shall
determine the suitability with regard to avoid hazards from impact and friction.”
3. The antennas for type 5400, are non-conducting and the area of the non-conducting
part exceeds the maximum permissible areas for Group IIC and according to IEC
60079-0 .2011 clause 7.4: 20 cm2 for EPL Gb and 4 cm2 for EPL Ga. Therefore, when the
antenna is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere, appropriate measures must be
taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
4. The Ex ia version of model 5400 may be supplied by an Ex ib certified safety barrier. The
whole circuit shall then be regarded type Ex ib.
The preferred type Ex ia or Ex ib shall be indicated on the marking label as specified in
the instructions for the transmitter. The antenna part, located in the process vessel, is
classified EPL Ga and electrically separated from the Ex ia or ib circuit.
5. ½” NPT threads need to be sealed for dust and water ingress protection, IP 66, IP 67 or
‘Ex t’, EPL Da or Db is required.
E7 Flameproof:
Ex d ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb (-40 °C d Ta d+70 °C(1))
Ex ta IIIC T79°C(2) Da (-40 °C d Ta d +70 °C(1))
Um = 250 V
Approval valid for HART, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and Modbus options.
I7, IG Intrinsically safe:
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga or Ex ib IIC T4 Ga/Gb (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C).
Ex ta IIIC T79°C(2) Da (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C).
4-20 mA / HART model: Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=130 mA, Pi=1.0 W, Ci=7.26 nF, Li=0 H.
FOUNDATION fieldbus model: Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=300 mA, Pi=1.5 W, Ci=4.95 nF, Li=0 H.
FISCO model: Ui=17.5 Vdc, Ii=380 mA, Pi=5.32 W, Ci=4.95 nF, Li<1 ì H.
Installation drawing: 9150079-907.
Approval valid for HART, FOUNDATION fieldbus, and FISCO options.
(1) +60 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus or FISCO option.
(2) +69 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus or FISCO option.
225
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
IECEx NEM 10.0005
N7 Type n:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
Ex nL IIC T4 Gc (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C (1))
HART® 4-20 mA(2)
Maximum input voltage Ui: 42.4 V, Maximum input current Ii: 23 mA
Maximum input power Pi: 1.0 W, Maximum internal capacitance Ci: 7.25 nF
Maximum internal inductance Li: 0 H
FOUNDATION fieldbus(2)
Maximum input voltage Ui: 32 V, Maximum input current Ii: 21 mA
Maximum input power Pi: 0.7 W, Maximum internal capacitance Ci: 4.95 nF
Maximum internal inductance Li: 0 H
Approval valid for HART and Foundation fieldbus options
installation drawing 9240031-958
B.5.5 EAC certifications
Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC)
EM, IM: Contact an Emerson Process Management representative for additional information.
(1) +60 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus or FISCO option.
(2) Valid for Ex nL.
226
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.5.6 Brazilian certifications
NCC/INMETRO Approvals
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
Refer to Certificate NCC 14.2256X
Standards
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2013, ABNT NBR IEC 60079-1:2009, ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009;
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008, ABNT NBR IEC 60079-27:2010, ABNT NBR IEC 60079-31:2011
E2 Flameproof:
Ex ia/db ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb(-40 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
Ex ta IIIC T79 °C(2)
IP66/67
I2, IB Intrinsically safe:
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga/Gb (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
Ex ta IIIC T79 °C(2) (-50 °C dTa d+70 °C(1))
IP66/67
4-20mA / HART model: Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=130 mA, Pi=1.0 W, Ci=7.26 nF, Li=0 H.
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus model: Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=300 mA, Pi=1.5 W, Ci=4.95 nF, Li=0 H.
FISCO model: Ui=17.5 Vdc, Ii=380 mA, Pi=5.32 W, Ci=4.95 nF, Li<1 ì H.
B.5.7 Chinese certifications
National Supervision and Inspection Center for Explosion
Protection and Safety of Instrumentation (NEPSI) approvals
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
Refer to Certificate GYJ111229X
E3 Flameproof:
Ex d ia IIC T4 (-40 °C < Ta < +70 °C(1))
Um=250 V
I3 Intrinsically safe:
Ex ia IIC T4 (-50 °C < Ta < +70 °C(1))
DIP A20 Ta 79°C(2) (-50 °C < Ta < +70 °C(1))
4-20 mA / HART model: Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=130 mA, Pi=1.0 W, Ci=7.26 nF, Li=0 H.
FOUNDATION fieldbus model: Ui=30 Vdc, Ii=300 mA, Pi=1.5 W, Ci=4.95 nF, Li=0 H.
FISCO model: Ui=17.5 Vdc, Ii=380 mA, Pi=5.32 W, Ci=4.95 nF, Li<1 ì H.
(1) +60 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus option or FISCO option.
(2) +69 °C with FOUNDATION fieldbus option or FISCO option.
227
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.5.8 Japanese certifications
Technology Institution of Industrial Safety (TIIS) Approval
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
Refer to certificate TC20109-TC20111 (4-20 mA HART) and TC20244-TC20246
FOUNDATION fieldbus)
E4(1) Flameproof:
4-20 mA HART model:
Transmitter: Ex d [ia] IIC T4x
-20 ~ +60 °C
DC 20 - 42.4 V
Um = 250 V
Uo = 22.2 V
Io = 177 mA
Po = 0.985 W
Antennas: Ex ia IIC T4X
FOUNDATION fieldbus model:
Transmitter: Ex d [ia] IIC T4x
-20 ~ +60 °C
DC 16 - 32 V
Um = 250 V
Uo = 22.2 V
Io = 177.5 mA
Po = 0.985 W
Antennas: Ex ia IIC T4X
Installation drawing: 05400-00375.
Approval valid for HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus options.
(1) Not available for solids applications.
228
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.5.9 Other certifications
Overfill protection
Cert. No: Z-65.16-475
U1 TÜV-tested and approved by DIBt for overfill protection according to the German WHG
regulations.
Approval valid for HART options.
Suitability for Intended Use
Compliant with NAMUR NE 95, version 07.07.2006 “Basic Principles of Homologation”.
Type Approval Certifications (Marine/shipboard approvals)
SBS(1) American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Product Type Approval
Certificate Number: 10-LD530607-PDA
Intended Service: For monitoring, process-control and hi/lo-alarming in continuous or
batch like operation for the marine applications on Oil, Product, Chemical and Gas
tankers as well as on Offshore mobile units.
ABS Rules: 2010 Steel Vessels Rules 1-1-4/7.7, 4-8-4/27.5 and 4-9-7, 5C-1-7/21.15.1;
5C-8-13/2; 5C-9-13/1
Approval valid for HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus options.
SDN(1)Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval Certificate
Certificate Number: A-11731
Intended Service: The Rosemount 5400 is found to comply with Det Norske Veritas' Rules
for Classification of Ships, High Speed & Light Craft and Det Norske Veritas' Offshore
Standards.
Approval valid for HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus options.
(1) Not available for solids applications.
Location classes
Temperature D
Humidity B
Vibration A
EMC B
Enclosure C
229
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
SLL(1) Lloyd's Register Type Approval Certificate
Certificate Number: 09/00034
Application: For use in environmental categories ENV1, ENV2, ENV3 and ENV5 as defined
in Lloyd's Register Test Specification No. 1: 2002.
Approval valid for HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus options.
SBV(1) Bureau Veritas Type Approval Certificate
Certificate Number: 22379/A0 BV
Requirements: BUREAU VERITAS Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships
Application: Approval valid for ships intended to be granted with the following additional
class notations: AUT-UMS, AUT-CCS, AUT-PORT and AUT-IMS.
Approval valid for HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus options.
SRS(1) Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Type Approval Certificate
Certificate Number: 08.00159.120
Application and limitations: Rosemount 5400 Series Twin-Lead Radar Level Transmitter
(models: 5401, 5402) are intended for using on sea-going ships, floating constructions
and fixed offshore platforms.
Approval valid for HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus options.
SGL(1) Germanischer Lloyd Type Approval Certificate
Certificate Number: 86 883 - 10 HH
Approval valid for HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus options.
B.5.10 Canadian Registration Number (CRN)
Cert No: 0F06878.2
The product design has been accepted and registered for use in Canada.
(1) Not available for solids applications.
230
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
B.6 Approval drawings
This section contains a FM Approvals system control drawing and Canadian Standards
Association and IECEx/ATEX/TIIS installation drawings. You must follow the installation
guidelines presented in order to maintain certified ratings for installed transmitters.
This section contains the following drawings:
Rosemount drawing 9150 079-905:
System control drawing for hazardous location installation of intrinsically safe FM
approved apparatus.
Rosemount drawing 9150 079-906:
System control drawing for hazardous location installation of CSA approved apparatus.
Rosemount drawing 9150 079-907:
Installation drawing for hazardous location installation of ATEX and IECEx approved
apparatus.
Rosemount drawing 9240031-958:
Installation drawing Ex n Rosemount 5400 Series
TIIS drawing TIIS-R-IS 05400-00375:
Installation drawing for hazardous location installation of TIIS approved apparatus.
231
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
Figure B-1. System Control Drawing for Hazardous Location Installation of Intrinsically Safe FM Approved
Apparatus
FM Approved Product
No revisions to this drawing
without prior Factory Mutual
Approval.
SME-3446 03461
ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK
A3ORIGINAL SIZE
GU-LN
0346
5400
GU-PO 6 PDF
9150 079-905
9150 079-905
0346 SYSTEM CONTROL DRAWING
for hazardous location installation of Intrinsically
Safe FM approved apparatus
7
1 / 1
ISSUED BY
APPROVED BY
WEEK
WEEK
PRODUCT CODE
DOC. TYPE FILE
TITLE
DWG NO. ISSUE SHEET
SCALE
1:1
1 ST ANGLE
FINISH, UNLESS
OTHERWISE STATED:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
The copyright/ownership of this document is and will remain ours.
The document must not be used without our authorization or brought
to the knowledge of a third party. Contravention will be prosecuted.
Rosemount Tank Radar AB, Sweden
ASSOCIATED APPARATUS
BARRIER
POWER
SUPPLY
HAZARDOUS LOCATION
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
ENTITY CONCEPT APPROVAL
The Entity concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus
not specifically examined in combination as a system. The approved values of max. open circuit
voltage (Voc or Vt) and max. short circuit current (Isc or It) and max. power (Voc x Isc / 4) or (Vt x It / 4),
for the associated apparatus must be less than or equal to the maximum safe input voltage (Vmax),
maximum safe input current (Imax), and maximum safe input power (Pmax) of the intrinsically safe
apparatus. In addition, the approved max. allowable connected capacitance (Ca or Co) of the associated
apparatus must be greater than the sum of the interconnecting cable capacitance and the unprotected
internal capacitance (Ci) of the intrinsically safe apparatus, and the the approved max. allowable
connected inductance (La or Lo) of the associated apparatus must be greater than the sum of the
interconnecting cable inductance and the unprotected internal inductance (Li) of the intrinsically
safe apparatus.
Notes:
1. No revision to this drawing without prior Factory Mutual approval.
2. Associated apparatus manufacturer's installation drawing must be followed when
installing this product.
3. Dust-Tight seal must be used when installed in Class II and Class III environments.
4. Control equipment connected to the barrier must not use or generate more than 250 Vrms or Vdc.
5. Resistance between Intrinsically Safe Ground and Earth Ground must be less than 1.0 ohm.
6. Installations should be in accordance with ANSI/ISA-RP12.6 "Installation of Intrinsically Safe
Systems for Hazardous Locations" and the National Electric Code (ANSI/NFPA 70).
7. The associated apparatus must be Factory Mutual Approved.
8. Connect supply wires to the appropriate terminals as indicated on the terminal block and in the installation documents.
ROSEMOUNT 5400 SERIES
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus for use in Class I,II,III,
Division 1, Groups A,B,C,D,E,F,G,
Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T4, Temperature Class T4 :
Model Entity Parameters Ambient Temperature
Limits
4-20 mA/HART IS Model Vmax(Ui) <= 30V, Imax(Ii) <= 130 mA
Pi <= 1W, Ci = 7.26 nF, Li = 0 uH
-50<=Ta<=70degC
Fieldbus IS Model Vmax(Ui) <= 30V, Imax(Ii) <= 300 mA
Pi <= 1.3W, Ci = 0, Li = 0 uH
-50<=Ta<=60degC
Fieldbus FISCO IS Model Vmax(Ui) <= 17.5V, Imax(Ii) <= 380 mA
Pi <= 5.32W, Ci = 0, Li = 0 uH
-50<=Ta<=60degC
2 SME-5134 0526 3SME-5513 0644 4SME-5879 0751
5 SME-7120 1144 SME-7473 1242 7 SME-7655 1409
WARNING : To prevent ignition of flammable or combustible atmospheres, read , understand and adhere to the
manufacturer's live maintenance procedures.
WARNING: Substitution of components may impair Intrinsic Safety.
WARNING: Potential Electrostatic Charging Hazard – The enclosure is a non-metallic construction. To prevent
the risk of electrostatic sparking the plastic surface should only be cleaned with a damp cloth.
WARNING: The apparatus enclosure contains aluminum and is considered to constitute a potential risk of
ignition by impact or friction. Care must be taken into account during installation and use to
prevent impact or friction.
6
03-21 Electronic Master - PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED - Rosemount Propriety
232
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
Figure B-2. System Control Drawing for Hazardous Location Installation of CSA Approved Apparatus
SME-3445
0346
1
ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK
A3ORIGINAL SIZE
GU-LN
0346
5400
GU-PO 6 PDF
9150 079-906
9150 079-906
0346 INSTALLATION DRAWING
for hazardous location installation
of CSA approved apparatus
6
1 / 1
ISSUED BY
APPROVED BY
WEEK
WEEK
PRODUCT CODE
DOC. TYPE FILE
TITLE
DWG NO. ISSUE SHEET
SCALE
1:1
1 ST ANGLE
FINISH, UNLESS
OTHERWISE STATED:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
T h e c o py right/ownership of this document is and will remain ours.
T h e d oc ument must not be used without our authorization or brought
to th e kn ow l edge of a third party. Contravention will be prosecuted.
Rosemount Tank Radar AB, Sweden
ASSOCIATED APPARATUS
BARRIER
POWER
SUPPLY
HAZARDOUS LOCATION
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
ROSEMOUNT 5400 SERIES
Intrinsically Safe Ex ia
Class I, Division 1, Groups A,B,C and D, Temperature Code T4 :
Model Entity Parameters Ambient Temperature
Limits
4-20 mA/HART IS Model Vmax <= 30V, Imax <= 130 mA
Pi <= 1W, Ci = 7.3 nF , Li = 0 uH
-50 <= Ta <= 70 deg C
Fieldbus IS Model Vmax <= 30V, Imax <= 300 mA
Pi <= 1.3W, Ci = 0, Li = 0 uH
-50 <= Ta <= 60 deg C
Fieldbus FISCO IS Model Vmax <= 17.5V, Imax <= 380 mA
Pi <= 5.32W, Ci = 0, Li = 0 uH
-50 <= Ta <= 60 deg C
2SME-5134 0526 3SME-5514 0644 SME-5880 0751
4
EX-CERTIFIED PRODUCT.
No modifications permitted
without reference to the
Ex-certifying Authorities.
5SME-6019 0840 6SME-7063 1123
ENTITY CONCEPT APPROVAL
The Entity concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not
specifically examined in combination as a system. The approved values of maximum open circuit voltage (Voc)
and maximum short circuit current (Isc) and maximum output power (or Voc x Isc / 4), for the associated apparatus
must be less than or equal to the maximum safe input voltage (Ui), maximum safe input current (Ii), and maximum
safe input power (Pi) of the intrinsically safe apparatus. In addition, the approved maximum allowable connected
capacitance (Ca) of the associated apparatus must be greater than the sum of the interconnecting cable capacitance
and the unprotected internal capacitance (Ci) of the intrinsically safe apparatus, and the approved maximum allowable
connected inductance (La) of the associated apparatus must be greater than the sum of the interconnecting cable
inductance and the unprotected internal inductance (Li) of the intrinsically safe apparatus.
Notes :
1. Entity parameters listed (for HART/Fieldbus Model) apply only to associated apparatus with linear output.
2. Control equipment connected to the barrier must not use or generate more than 250 Vrms or Vdc.
3. Connect supply wires to the appropriate terminals as indicated on the terminal block and in the
installation documents.
4. Installations should be in accordance with ANSI/ISA-RP12.6 "Installations of Intrinsically Safe Systems
for Hazardous Locations" and the Canadian Electric Code.
5. Product options bearing the DUAL SEAL marking on the label meets the Dual Seal requirements of ANSI/ISA
12.27.01. No additional process sealing is required. For the in-service limits applicable to a specific model, see
Process Pressure/Temperature range in Appendix A of the Reference manual.
233
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
Figure B-3. Installation Drawing for Hazardous Location Installation of ATEX and IECEx Approved Apparatus
SME-3444
0346
1
ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK ISSUE CH. ORDER No WEEK
A3ORIGINAL SIZE
GU-LN
0346
5400
GU-PO 6 PDF
9150 079-907
9150 079-907
0346 INSTALLATION DRAWING
for hazardous location installation of
ATEX and IECEx approved apparatus
7
1 / 1
ISSUED BY
APPROVED BY
WEEK
WEEK
PRODUCT CODE
DOC. TYPE FILE
TITLE
DWG NO. ISSUE SHEET
SCALE
1:1
1 ST ANGLE
FINISH, UNLESS
OTHERWISE STATED:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
The copyright/ownership of this document is and will remain ours.
The document must not be used without our authorization or brought
to the knowledge of a third party. Contravention will be prosecuted.
Rosemount Tank Radar AB, Sweden
ACCOCIATED APPARATUS
BARRIER
POWER
SUPPLY
HAZARDOUS LOCATION
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
ROSEMOUNT 5400 SERIES
EX-CERTIFIED PRODUCT.
No modifications permitted
without reference to the
Ex-certifying Authorities.
Intrinsic Safety Parameters :
Ƒ,,*([LD,,&7*DRUƑ,,*([LE,,&7*D*E,,'([WD,,,&'D
Model Parameters AmEient Temperature
Limits
4-20 mA/HART IS Model Ui <= 30V, Ii <= 130 mA
Pi <= 1W, Ci = 7.26 nF, Li = 0
-50 <= Ta <= 70 deg C
Fieldbus IS Model
Pi <= 1.5W, Ci = 4.95nF, Li = 0
-50 <= Ta <= 60 deg C
Fieldbus FISCO IS Model
Pi <= 5.32W, Ci = 4.95nF, Li = 0
-50 <= Ta <= 60 deg C
Ui <= 30V, Ii <= 300 mA
Ui <= 17.5V, Ii <= 380 mA
SME-6440
20511 3SME-5236 0548 4SME-5515 0644
5SME-6440 1048
6
SME-7230
1217
7
SME-7653
1409
INTRINSICALLY SAFE INSTALLATIONS
The approved values of maximum open circuit voltage (Uo) and maximum short circuit current (Io) and
maximum output power (or Uo x Io / 4), for the associated apparatus must be less than or equal to the
maximum safe input voltage (Ui), maximum safe input current (Ii), and maximum safe input power (Pi)
of the intrinsically safe apparatus. In addition, the approved maximum allowable connected capacitance
(Co) of the associated apparatus must be greater than the sum of the interconnecting cable capacitance
and the unprotected internal capacitance (Ci) of the intrinsically safe apparatus, and the approved
maximum allowable connected inductance (Lo) of the associated apparatus must be greater than the
sum of the interconnecting cable inductance and the unprotected internal inductance (Li) of the
intrinsically safe apparatus.
Notes :
1. Safety parameters listed (for HART/Fieldbus Model) apply only to associated apparatus with linear output.
2. Control equipment connected to the barrier must not use or generate more than 250 Vrms or Vdc.
3. Connect supply wires to the appropriate terminals as indicated on the terminal
block table and in the installation documents.
SPECIFIC CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (X) :
1. The intrinsically safe circuits do not withstand the 500V AC test as specified in IEC 60079-11 clause 6.4.13.
2. “Potential ignition hazards by impact or friction need to be considered according to IEC 60079-0:2011
clause 8.3 (for EPL Ga and EPL Gb) and clause 8.4 (for EPL Da and EPL Db) , when the transmitter
enclosure and antennas exposed to the exterior atmosphere of the tank, is made with light metals
containing aluminium or titanium. The end used shall determine the suitability with regard to avoid
hazards from impact and friction.”
3. The antennas for type 5400, are non-conducting and the area of the non-conducting part exceeds
the maximum permissible areas for Group IIC and according to IEC 60079-0 .2011 clause 7.4: 20 cm2
for EPL Gb and 4 cm2 for EPL Ga. Therefore, when the antenna is used in a potentially explosive
atmosphere, appropriate measures must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge.
4. The Ex ia version of model 5400 may be supplied by an Ex ib certified safety barrier.
The whole circuit shall then be regarded type Ex ib.
The preferred type Ex ia or Ex ib shall be indicated on the marking label as specified in the instructions
for the transmitter. The antenna part, located in the process vessel, is classified EPL Ga and electrically
separated from the Ex ia or ib circuit.
5. ½” NPT threads need to be sealed for dust and water ingress protection,
IP 66, IP 67 or ‘Ex t’, EPL Da or Db is required.
234
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
Figure B-4. Installation drawing Ex n Rosemount 5400 Series
ORIGINAL SIZE A3
2011-06-28 14:34
9240031-958_I02_P01_A3.DOCX
ISSUE
MODIF. ORDER NO.
WEEK
ISSUE
MODIF. ORDER NO.
WEEK
ISSUE
MODIF. ORDER NO.
WEEK
1
SME-5859
1041
2
SME-6864
1126
ISSUED BY
WEEK
DOC. TYPE
PRODUCT CODE
TITLE
EE-VM
1041
6
5400
INSTALLATION DRAWING Exn
ROSEMOUNT 5400 SERIES
APPROVED BY
WEEK
FILE
EAP
1041
Word
The copyright/ownership of this document is
and will remain ours. The document must not
be used without our authorization or brought
to the knowledge of a
third party.
Contravention will be prosecuted.
Rosemount Tank Radar AB, Sweden
DOC NO.
ISSUE
PAGE
9240031-
958
2
1/1
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION
HART:
42.4 VDC , 23 mA
FOUNDATION FIELDBUS:
32 VDC, 21 mA
Note 1
nA
Ui: 42.4 V
Ii: 23 mA
Pi: 1 W
Li: Negligible
Uo: 42.4 V Ci: 7.25 nF
nL Io: 23 mA Note 1
Po: 1 W
Lo > 0
Co > 7.25 nF
Notes:
1 Connect supply wires to the appropriate terminals as indicated on the terminal block label
and in the installation documents.
Input parameters for Non-sparking
Model
Parameters
Ambient
Temperature Limits
CURRENT LOOP / HART
42.4 VDC, 23 mA,
–50 ≤ Ta ≤ 70 °C
FOUNDATION FIELDBUS
32 VDC, 21 mA
–50 ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C
Input parameters for Energy Limited
Model
Parameters
Ambient
Temperature Limits
CURRENT LOOP
/
HART
Ui = 42.4 V, Ii = 23 mA, Pi
= 1.0 W
Ci = 7.25 nF, Li: Negligible
–50 ≤ Ta ≤ 70 °C
FOUNDATION FIELDBUS
Ui = 32 V, Ii = 21 mA, Pi = 0.7 W
Ci = 4.95 nF, Li: Negligible
–50 ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C
POWER
SUPPLY
EX-CERTIFIED PRODUCT
No
modifications permitted without
reference to the Ex
-
certifying Authorities.
POWER
SUPPLY
Barrier
235
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
Figure B-5. Installation Drawing for Hazardous Location Installation of TIIS Approved Apparatus
ᅜෆ(TIIS)㜵⇿ᵝ 1)
ᑐ㇟ᶵჾ
㸺5401/5402㸼
㜵⇿グྕ
ධຊ㒊 Ex d [ia] IIC T4 X, ಙྕኚ㒊ཬࡧࣥࢸࢼ Ex ia IIC T4 X
ᐃ ᱁
ᮏᏳᅇ㊰ Uo = 22.2V Io = 177mA Po = 0.985W
㠀ᮏᏳᅇ㊰
㟁※ DC 20~42.4V/4-20mA, DC 16~32V/ Fieldbus
チᐜ㟁ᅽ AC 250V 50/60Hz, DC250V
࿘ᅖ ᗘ -20Υ㹼60Υ
1) ὀ㸸ᨵ㐀⚗Ṇࠋ 05400-00375B
㟼㟁Ẽ㜵Ṇࡢࡓࡵࣥࢸࢼ㒊ࡢᣔࡁ⚗Ṇࠋ
Ⓨⅆ㜵Ṇࡢࡓࡵ㔠ᒓ㒊ࡢ⾪ᧁࡲࡓࡣᦶ᧿⚗Ṇࠋ
᥋ᆅ➃Ꮚࡣ㠀༴㝤ሙᡤ࠾࠸࡚ࠊ༢⊂࡛ A✀᥋ᆅᕤ‽ࡌ࡚᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡇࠋ
⇿Ⓨᛶ࢞ࢫࡲࡓࡣẼࡀᏑᅾࡍࡿሙᡤ࡛ࡣ࢝ࣂ࣮㛤ᨺ⚗Ṇࠋ
እ㒊ᑟ⥺ࡣ⪏⇕ ᗘ 70Υ௨ୖࡢࢣ࣮ࣈࣝࢆ⏝ࡍࡿࡇࠋ
2) ୍⯡ᅇ㊰(㟁※ཬࡧධฟຊ)ࡣࡑࡢධຊ㟁※,ᶵჾෆ㒊ࡢ㟁ᅽ➼ࡀṇᖖ≧ែ࠾ࡼࡧ␗ᖖ≧ែ࠾࠸࡚ࡶ AC/DC250V 50/60Hz ࢆ㉸࠼࡞࠸ࡶࡢࡍࡿࠋ
ᮏᏳ⏝᥋ᆅ➃Ꮚࡣ㠀༴㝤ሙ
ᡤ࠾࠸࡚༢⊂࡛ $ ✀᥋ᆅࡍࡿࠋ
ࢩࢫࢸ࣒ᵓᡂᅗ 2)
236
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix B: Product certifications
November 2014
Product Certifications
237
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
Appendix C Advanced Configuration
Tank geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 237
Advanced analog output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 239
Advanced transmitter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 239
Advanced functions in RRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 243
The advanced transmitter configuration includes settings which can be used to fine tune the
transmitter for special applications. Normally, the standard settings are sufficient.
C.1 Tank geometry
Figure C-1. Advanced Tank Geometry
C.1.1 Distance offset (G)
The Distance Offset is used when hand-dipping is done at a separate nozzle. By setting the
Distance Offset the measured level by the gauge can be adjusted to correspond with the level
value obtained by hand-dipping.
The Distance Offset (G) is the distance between the upper reference point and the flange. (The
flange is referred to as the Transmitter’s Reference Point). The Distance Offset can be used to
specify a reference point at the top of the tank. Set the Distance Offset to zero to identify the
lower side of the device flange as the upper reference point. The Distance Offset is defined as
positive if an upper reference point above the Upper Reference Point is used.
Tank height (R)
Product level
Tank reference point
Distance offset (G)
Min level offset (C)
Upper reference point
Hold off distance
Lower reference point
(Level = 0)
238
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.1.2 Minimum level offset (C)
The Minimum Level Offset (C) defines a lower null zone which extends the measurement range
beyond the Lower Reference Point to the tank bottom. The Minimum Level Offset is the distance
between the Lower Reference Point (Level = 0) and the minimum accepted level at the tank
bottom. Set the Minimum Level Offset to zero to use the tank bottom as the Lower Reference
Point. This case corresponds to the standard tank geometry configuration.
Note that the tank height must be measured to the Lower Reference Point regardless if it is
located at the tank bottom, or at an elevated point.
C.1.3 Hold off distance
This parameter should only be changed if there are disturbing objects close to the antenna. No
valid measurements are possible above the Hold Off Distance. By increasing the Hold Off
Distance, the measuring range is reduced. See “Hold off setting” on page 250 for more
information.
C.1.4 Calibration distance
The Calibration Distance is defaulted to zero. It is used to adjust the transmitter so measured
levels match hand-dipped or otherwise known product levels. Normally, a minor adjustment is
necessary. There may, for example, be a deviation between the actual tank height and the value
from tank drawings, which are usually stored in the transmitter database.
Non-metallic (for example, plastic) vessels and installation geometry may introduce an offset for
the zero reference point. This offset may be up to ± 10 mm. The offset can be compensated for
using Calibration Distance.
239
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.2 Advanced analog output settings
The 20 mA Upper Range Value should be outside the Hold Off Distance (see “Hold off distance”
on page 238) in order to utilize the full range of the analog output.
Figure C-2. Advanced Range Value Settings
C.3 Advanced transmitter settings
C.3.1 Antenna type
The transmitter is designed to optimize measurement performance for each available antenna
type.
This parameter is pre-configured at factory but may need to be set if a non-standard antenna is
used.
C.3.2 Empty tank handling
The Empty Tank Handling functions handle situations when the surface echo is close to the tank
bottom:
Tracking of weak product echoes
Handling lost echoes
If the surface echo is lost, this function has the transmitter present a zero-level measurement.
An alarm is activated unless the alarm has been blocked.
20 mA Upper Range Value (URV)
Product level
4 mA Lower Range Value (LRV)
Range 0-100 %
Upper reference point
Min level offset (C)
Hold off distance
Lower reference point
(Level = 0)
240
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
Empty tank detection area
The Empty Tank Detection Area is the range within a lower limit of 16 in.
(400 mm) and a higher limit of 39 in. (1000 mm) above the tank bottom. If the surface echo is
lost in this region, the tank is considered empty (the device enters Empty Tank State) and the
transmitter presents a zero level reading.
If the tank is empty, the transmitter searches double the Empty Tank Detection Area for the
product surface. When a new echo is found, it is considered to be the product surface.
It is important that there are no disturbances in this area, but if there are, they may need to be
filtered out.
This function requires the Bottom Echo Visible function to be disabled. The current Empty Tank
Detection Area value is shown in Advanced Setup in RRM and can be adjusted manually, if
required. See “Empty tank detection area” on page 244.
Bottom echo visible
Only set this parameter if the bottom echo is visible. Setting this parameter will use the bottom
echo as a disturbance echo to facilitate tracking of weak surface echoes close to the tank
bottom.
Check that the gauge detects the tank bottom when the tank is empty before activating this
function. See “Bottom echo visible” on page 243.
Tank bottom projection
This function handles situations close to the tank bottom and may enhance measurement
performance in the tank bottom region. In this region, the signal from the actual tank bottom
may be significantly stronger than the measurement signal from the product surface, in some
situations.
Extra echo
Extra Echo Detection is used for tanks with domed or conical bottom types and when there is no
strong echo from the tank bottom when the tank is empty and an echo beneath the actual tank
bottom can sometimes be seen. See “Extra echo function” on page 245.
Level alarm is not set when tank is empty
If the echo from the product is lost in the area close to the tank bottom (Empty Tank Detection
Area), the device enters Empty Tank State and triggers an alarm. Two types of alarms are
triggered:
Invalid Level (can be seen in the Diagnostics window)
The Analog Output enters Alarm Mode
241
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.3.3 Full tank handling
Full tank detection area
This parameter defines a range where the surface echo can be lost. If the echo is lost in this
range, the tank is considered full (the device enters Full Tank State) and the device presents
maximum level indication.
When the tank is full, the device searches double the Full Tank Detection Area for the product
surface. When a new echo is found in this range, it is identified as the product surface.
It is important to filter out any disturbances in this area.
Level above hold off distance possible
This function should be enabled if the level can rise above the Hold Off Distance/UNZ and it is
necessary to display the tank as full in that case. Normally, the device will be able to track the
surface and the product level will never rise to that height. If the function is not enabled and the
surface is lost at the top of the tank, the device searches the whole tank for a surface echo.
Note
Measurements are not performed within the Hold Off Distance/UNZ region.
Level alarm is not set when tank is full
If the surface echo is lost, close to the top of the tank. The level value will normally be displayed
as “invalid.” This parameter should be set to suppress the “invalid” display.
Note
Setting this parameter disables the analog output so it does not enter alarm mode for invalid
levels close to the antenna.
See “Full tank handling” on page 247 for more information.
C.3.4 Double bounce
Some radar waves are reflected at the surface and then reflected against the tank roof and back
to the surface before being detected by the transmitter. Normally, these signals have a low
amplitude and are ignored by the transmitter. For spherical and horizontal cylinder tanks
however, the amplitude may be strong enough for the transmitter to interpret the double
bounce as the surface echo. Setting the Double Bounce Possible parameter can solve this type of
measurement situation. This function should only be used if double bounces cannot be
corrected by changing the mechanical installation. See “Double bounce” on page 248 for more
information.
242
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.3.5 Surface echo tracking
Slow search
This variable controls how to search for the surface when a surface echo is lost. With this
parameter set, the transmitter starts searching for the surface at the last known level and
gradually increases the search region until the surface is found. If this variable is not set, the
transmitter searches the whole tank. This parameter is typically used for tanks with turbulent
conditions.
Slow search speed
This parameter indicates the speed the search region (Slow Search window) is expanded when
the Slow Search function is active.
Double surface
Indicates that there are two liquids or foam in the tank resulting in two reflecting surfaces. The
upper liquid or foam layer must be partially transparent to the radar signal.
The Select Lower Surface parameter specifies the surface layer selected as the surface.
Upper product dielectric constant
This is the dielectric constant for the upper product if there is a double surface situation. A more
precise value results in better accuracy for the lower surface level.
Select lower surface
This function should only be used if Double Surface is set. If Select Lower Surface is set, the lower
surface is identified as the product surface. If not, the upper surface is used.
Echo timeout
Echo Timeout defines the time, in seconds, after the echo has been lost, before the transmitter
starts searching for a surface echo. The transmitter will not start searching, or trigger any
alarms, until this time has elapsed.
Close distance window
This parameter defines a window centered at the current surface position where new surface
echo candidates can be selected. The size of the window is ±CloseDist. Echoes outside this
window will not be considered surface echoes and the transmitter will jump to the strongest
echo inside this window. If there are rapid level changes in the tank, the value of the Close
Distance Window can be increased to prevent the transmitter from missing level changes. On
the other hand, a large value may cause the transmitter to select an invalid echo as the surface
echo.
243
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.3.6 Filter settings
Damping value
The Damping Value parameter determines how quickly the transmitter responds to level
changes and how robust the measurement signal is against noise. A damping value of 10
indicates that in 10 seconds the output from the transmitter is approximately 63 % of the new
level value. Consequently, when there are rapid level changes in the tank, it may be necessary to
decrease the Damping Value for the transmitter to track the surface. In noisy environments,
with low level rates, it may be best to increase the damping value for a stable output signal.
Activate jump filter
The Jump Filter is typically used for turbulent surface applications where it smooths the echo
tracking as the level passes, for example, an agitator. If the surface echo is lost and a new surface
echo is found, the Jump Filter has the transmitter wait before jumping to the new echo so it can
be validated. During that time the new echo has to be considered a valid echo.
C.4 Advanced functions in RRM
C.4.1 Empty tank handling
Bottom echo visible
The Bottom Echo Visible... parameter allows the transmitter to separate the product surface from
the tank bottom by identifying the bottom echo as a disturbance echo. This is useful for
products relatively transparent for microwaves, such as oil. For non-transparent products, such
as water, there is no visible bottom echo until the tank is empty.
To enable this function:
1. Disable the Use Automatic Empty Tank Handling Settings option.
2. Select the Bottom Echo Visible if Tank is Empty check-box.
Only use this function for tanks with a Flat bottom type where the radar echo from the tank
bottom is clearly visible. If there is no distinct bottom echo, even if the tank is empty, this
parameter should be disabled. Otherwise, if the surface echo is temporarily lost, the transmitter
starts searching for the product surface in the tank and may incorrectly interpret any object as
the surface.
The spectrum function in the RRM program can be used to check if the gauge detects the tank
bottom in an empty tank.
244
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
Empty tank detection area
If the signal from the product surface is lost within the region given by the parameter Empty
Tank Detection Area, the tank is considered empty and the product level is presented as zero.
If the surface is lost above the Empty Tank Detection Area, the transmitter starts searching the
entire tank for the surface.
The Empty Tank Detection Area can be increased if the surface is lost outside the Empty Tank
Detection Area in a non-critical region of the tank.
1. Disable Use Automatic Empty Tank Handling Settings.
2. Type the desired value in the Empty Tank Detection Area input field.
Amplitude
Distance
Echo from
tank bottom
Surface echo
245
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
See “Empty tank detection area” on page 240 for further information.
Extra echo function
The Extra Echo Detection function makes for more robust measurements in the bottom region
for conical or domed bottom shape tanks. In this case, there is no strong echo from the tank
bottom when the tank is empty, and a virtual echo beneath the actual tank bottom can
sometimes be seen.
If the transmitter is unable to detect the tank bottom, this function can ensure that the
transmitter stays in Empty Tank state as long as an extra echo is present.
When the tank is empty, use the spectrum function in RRM to verify if such an echo exists or not
by entering a distance that exceeds the tank bottom. The suitable values for Extra Echo Min
Distance, Extra Echo Max Distance and Extra Echo Min Amplitude can also be viewed in the
spectrum. The tank is considered empty when an echo is within the minimum and maximum
distance and the amplitude is above the specified limit.
Amplitude
Distance
If the product surface
is lost in this region,
the tank is considered
empty.
246
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
Amplitude
Distance
Extra echo min. distance
Extra echo max. distance
247
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.4.2 Full tank handling
With the Full Tank Handling function product levels close to the antenna can be reported as a
Full Tank. Normally, measurements are not allowed closer to the antenna than specified by the
Hold Off Distance parameter. If the product level enters the Hold Off Distance region, the
transmitter reports Measurement Error and starts searching for the surface.
By setting the Level above Hold Off Distance possible parameter, the transmitter reports Full Tank
when the product level enters the Hold Off Distance region. Note that:
The region where the tank is considered full is specified by the Full Tank Detection Area
The level alarm for Full Tank is normally disabled
Amplitude
Distance
If the product surface is
lost in this region, the
transmitter presents full
tank.
Full tank
detection
area
Hold off
distance
248
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.4.3 Double bounce
A double bounce echo is an echo that has been reflected against the tank roof then down to the
surface before being detected by the transmitter.
Double bounces are commonly present in spherical or horizontal cylinder tanks. In this case, the
tank roof can sometimes amplify the double bounce echo amplitude. Normally, double bounce
echoes appear when the tank is 60-70 % full. In these cases, the double bounce echo can cause
the transmitter to lock onto the wrong echo.
The Double Bounce function is used for managing problems with echoes appearing in the tank
because of the tank shape stronger than the surface echo itself.
The Double Bounce Offset is given by the following formula:
Double Bounce Offset = B - 2*A,
where A is the distance from the Tank Reference Point to the product surface, and B is the
distance from the Tank Reference Point to the Double Bounce echo. In many cases, the Double
Bounce Offset is given by the height of the nozzle.
Note that the surface echo is required to suppress the double bounce. If the surface echo enters
the hold off distance region, there is no product surface reference and the double bounce might
be interpreted as the surface echo.
A
B
Double bounce offset=B - 2*A
Amplitude
Distance
249
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.4.4 Surface echo tracking
The Surface Echo Tracking function can eliminate ghost
echo problems below the product surface. This may occur
in Still-pipes because of multiple reflections between the
pipe wall, flange, and antenna. In the tank spectrum, these
echoes appear as amplitude peaks at various distances
below the product surface.
To activate this function, select the Always Track First Echo
check-box making sure there are no disturbing echoes
above the product surface when this function is activated.
Amplitude
Distance
First echo corresponding to
the product surface
Surface
250
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix C: Advanced configuration
November 2014
Advanced Configuration
C.4.5 Hold off setting
The Hold Off parameter is set to a default value that rarely needs any adjustment (see “Hold off
distance” on page 238 for definition of Hold Off distance). The Process Seal antenna is slightly
more affected by disturbances in the nozzle than the cone and rod antennas. If necessary, a
small Hold Off adjustment may be sufficient to solve the problem.
In a typical situation, a small object, such as a weld joint, may give rise to a disturbing echo. If
this disturbance is strong enough, the transmitter may misinterpret this echo as the product
surface. By setting the Hold Off large enough to avoid a measurement within and close to the
nozzle, the problem is solved, as illustrated below.
The Spectrum Plot function in RRM allows for adjustment to the Hold Off distance:
1. In RRM, click the Spectrum Plot icon
to open the Spectrum Analyzer
window.
2. Select the Configuration Mode tab.
3. Click the Read button and view the
amplitude versus distance graph. If
there is a disturbance caused by an
object in the nozzle, the transmitter
may misinterpret the position of the
surface, as shown to the left. In this
example, the true surface position is
at amplitude peak P3.
4. Move the Hold Off distance line away
from the transmitter i.e. to a position
below the nozzle.
5. Click the Store button.
6. The transmitter will now disregard
any disturbing echoes in the nozzle
and find the product surface.
Hold Off
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Hold off
251
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix D: Performing proof test
November 2014
Performing Proof Test
Appendix D Performing Proof Test
Performing proof test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 251
Field communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 251
RRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 253
AMS Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 255
D.1 Performing proof test
This test detects approximately 95 % of the possible Dangerously Undetected (DU) failures of
the transmitter including the sensor element. Here is a description of how to perform the test
using a Field Communicator, RRM, or AMS® Suite. Note that the transmitter is not safety-rated
during proof tests. Alternative means should be used to ensure process safety during such
activities.
Required tools: HART® host/communicator and a mA meter.
D.2 Field communicator
Prior to this test, inspect the echo curve to ensure that no disturbing echoes affecting the
measurement performance are present.
HART Sequence: [2, 6, 1]
1. Bypass the safety PLC or take other appropriate actions to avoid false trip.
2. Disable write protection if the function is enabled.
HART Sequence: [3, 2, 1, 2, 1]. Type the password.
3. Using loop test, enter the mA value representing the high alarm current. Verify that the
analog output current is correct using the reference meter.
This step tests for compliance voltage problems, such as low power supply voltage or
increased wiring resistance.
HART Sequence: [2, 4, 1, 7]. Select 3 Other. Enter the analog output level representing
the high alarm current. Press Enter and click OK.
Verify that the analog output current is correct. Click Abort to end loop test.
4. Using loop test, enter the mA value representing the low alarm current. Verify that the
analog output current is correct using the reference meter.
This step tests for possible quiescent current related failures.
HART Sequence: [2, 4, 1, 7]. Select 3 Other. Enter the analog output level representing
the low alarm current. Press Enter and click OK.
Verify that the analog output current is correct. Click Abort to end loop test. Verify that
the Current output is restored to the original mode.
252
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix D: Performing proof test
November 2014
Performing Proof Test
Figure D-1. Range Values
5. Perform a two-point calibration check of the transmitter by applying level at two points
within the measuring range. Verify that the current output corresponds to the level
input values using a known reference measurement.
This step verifies that the analog output is correct in the operating range and that the
Primary Variable is properly configured.
Note that the applied level has to be between the Upper and Lower Range values,
otherwise the transmitter enters alarm mode. If the applied level is outside the
Maximum Measuring Range, the level reading accuracy may be reduced. For best
performance, use the
4-20 mA range points as calibration points. See Figure 1.
6. Enable write protection.
HART Sequence: [3, 2, 1, 2, 1].
7. Restore the loop to full operation.
8. Remove the bypass from the safety PLC or otherwise restore normal operation.
9. Document the test results for future reference.
20 mA Upper Range Value (URV)
Product Level
4 mA Lower Range Value (LRV)
Range 0-100 %
Upper Reference Point
Min Level Offset (C)
Hold Off Distance
Lower Reference Point
(Level=0)
253
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix D: Performing proof test
November 2014
Performing Proof Test
D.3 RRM
Prior to this test, inspect the echo curve to ensure that no disturbing echoes affecting the
measurement performance are present.
RRM: Tools / Echo Curve
1. Bypass the safety PLC or take other appropriate actions to avoid false trip.
2. Disable write protection if the function is enabled.
RRM: Select Tools, Lock / Unlock Configuration Area from the menu.
Type the password being used for this device and click OK.
3. Set Alarm mode to High Current. Using loop test, enter the mA value representing the
high alarm current. Verify that the analog output current is correct using the reference
meter.
This step tests for compliance voltage problems, such as low power supply voltage or
increased wiring resistance.
RRM: Select Setup, Output from the menu.
Make sure Alarm Mode AOut 1 is set to High Current. Click Store to save changes. Click
Loop test... and enter the Current AOut 1 value representing the high alarm current.
Click Start and verify that the output current is correct.
Click Stop to end loop test.
4. Set Alarm mode to Low Current. Using loop test, enter the mA value representing the
low alarm current. Verify that the analog output current is correct using the reference
meter.
This step tests for possible quiescent current related failures.
RRM: Set Alarm Mode AOut 1 to Low Current. Click Store to save changes. Click Loop
test... and enter the Current AOut 1 value representing the low alarm current.
Click Start and verify that the output current is correct.
Click Stop to end loop test.
Alarm Mode AOut 1
Loop test...
254
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix D: Performing proof test
November 2014
Performing Proof Test
5. Restore the Alarm mode to the original mode used in the loop. Verify that the analog
output current is correct.
RRM: Set Alarm Mode AOut 1 to original mode. Click Store to save changes.
Verify that the output current is correct.
6. Perform a two-point calibration check of the transmitter by applying level at two points
within the measuring range. Verify that the current output corresponds to the level
input values using a known reference measurement.
This step verifies that the analog output is correct in the operating range and that the
Primary Variable is properly configured.
Note that the applied level has to be between the Upper and Lower Range values,
otherwise the transmitter enters alarm mode. If the applied level is outside the
Maximum Measuring Range, the level reading accuracy may be reduced. For best
performance, use the
4-20 mA range points as calibration points. See Figure 1 on page 252.
7. Enable write protection.
RRM: Select Tools, Lock / Unlock Configuration Area from the menu.
8. Restore the loop to full operation.
9. Remove the bypass from the safety PLC or otherwise restore normal operation.
10. Document the test results for future reference.
255
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix D: Performing proof test
November 2014
Performing Proof Test
D.4 AMS Suite
Prior to this test, inspect the echo curve to ensure that no disturbing echoes affecting the
measurement performance are present.
AMS: Click Configure / Setup / Echo Curve
1. Bypass the safety PLC or take other appropriate actions to avoid false trip.
2. Disable write protection if the function is enabled.
AMS: Select Device Diagnostics/ Tools from the left menu, and choose the General
tab.
Click Write Protect... and follow the instructions. (Note that the password cannot be
written with letters.)
3. Using loop test, enter the mA value representing the high alarm current. Verify that the
analog output current is correct using the reference meter.
This step tests for compliance voltage problems, such as low power supply voltage or
increased wiring resistance.
AMS: Select Configure / Setup, Analog Output from the menu.
Write Protect...
Loop Test...
256
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix D: Performing proof test
November 2014
Performing Proof Test
Click Loop Test... Select Other and enter the mA value representing the high Analog
Output Level and follow the instructions. Verify that the
output current is correct.
4. Using loop test, enter the mA value representing the low alarm mode. Verify that the
analog output current is correct using the reference meter.
This step tests for possible quiescent current related failures.
AMS: Select Configure / Setup, Analog Output from the menu. Click Loop Test...
Select Other and enter the mA value representing the low Analog Output Level and
follow the instructions. Click OK to save changes. Verify that the output current is
correct.
Select End to stop loop test. Verify that the Current output is restored to the original
mode.
5. Perform a two-point calibration check of the transmitter by applying level at two points
within the measuring range. Verify that the current output corresponds to the level
input values using a known reference measurement.
This step verifies that the analog output is correct in the operating range and that the
Primary Variable is properly configured.
Note that the applied level has to be between the Upper and Lower Range values,
otherwise the transmitter enters alarm mode. If the applied level is outside the
Maximum Measuring Range, the level reading accuracy may be reduced. For best
performance, use the
4-20 mA range points as calibration points. See Figure 1 on page 252.
6. Enable write protection.
AMS: Select Configure / Manual Setup from the menu, choose the Device tab, check
Write Protected, and follow the instructions. (Note that the password cannot be
written with letters.)
7. Restore the loop to full operation.
8. Remove the bypass from the safety PLC or otherwise restore normal operation.
9. Document the test results for future reference.
257
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix E: Level transducer block
November 2014
Level Transducer Block
Appendix E Level Transducer Block
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 257
Parameters and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 258
Supported units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 263
Diagnostics device errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 264
E.1 Overview
This section contains information on the Rosemount 5400 Series Transducer Block (TB).
Descriptions of all Transducer Block parameters, errors, and diagnostics are listed.
E.1.1 Definition
The transducer block contains the actual measurement data, including a level and distance
reading. Channels 1–6 are assigned to these measurements. The transducer block includes
information about sensor type, engineering units, and all parameters needed to configure the
radar gauge.
E.1.2 Channel definitions
Each input has an assigned channel which can be linked to the AI block. The channels for the
Rosemount 5400 Series are the following:
Table E-1. Channel Assignments
Channel name Channel number Process variable
Level 1 RADAR_LEVEL
Ullage 2 RADAR_ULLAGE
Level Rate 3 RADAR_LEVELRATE
Signal Strength 4 RADAR_LEVEL_SIGNAL_STRENGTH
Volume 5 RADAR_VOLUME
Internal Temperature 6 RADAR_INTERNAL_TEMPERATURE
258
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix E: Level transducer block
November 2014
Level Transducer Block
E.2 Parameters and descriptions
Table E-2. Level Transducer Block Parameters and Descriptions
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
ST_REV 1
The revision level of the static data
associated with the function block.
The revision value increments each
time a static parameter value in the
block is changed.
TAG_DESC 2 The user description of the intended
application of the block.
STRATEGY 3
The strategy field can be used to
identify grouping of blocks. This
data is not checked or processed by
the block.
ALERT_KEY 4
The identification number of the
plant unit. This information may be
used in the host for sorting alarms,
etc.
MODE_BLK 5
0x08(Auto)
0x08(Auto)
0x88(Auto | OOS)
0x08(Auto)
The actual, target, permitted, and
normal modes of the block.
• Target: The mode to “go to”
• Actual: The mode the “block is
currently in”
• Permitted: Allowed modes that
target may take on
• Normal: Most common mode for
target
BLOCK_ERR 6 0x0000(0x0000)
This parameter reflects the error
status associated with the hardware
or software components associated
with a block. It is a bit string, so that
multiple errors may be shown.
UPDATE_EVT 7 This alert is generated by any
change to the static data.
BLOCK_ALM 8
The block alarm is used for all
configuration, hardware,
connection failure, or system
problems in the block. The cause of
the alert is entered in the subcode
field. The first alert to become active
will set the Active status in the
Status parameter. As soon as the
Unreported status is cleared by the
alert reporting task, another block
alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the
subcode has changed.
TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY 9 0 Directory that specifies the number
and starting indices of the
transducers in the transducer block.
TRANSDUCER_TYPE 10 0x8180(0x8180) Identifies the transducer.
XD_ERROR 11 0x00(No error) A transducer block alarm subcode.
COLLECTION_DIRECTORY 12
A directory that specifies the
number, starting indices, and DD
Item ID’s of the data collections in
each transducer within a transducer
block.
TRANSDUCER_TYPE_VER 13 769 Transducer type version = 0x0301
RADAR_LEVEL 14 Level
259
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix E: Level transducer block
November 2014
Level Transducer Block
RADAR_LEVEL_RANGE 15
100
0
0X03f2(m)
3
The following sub-elements are
available:
• EU_100
•EU_0
• UNITS_INDEX
•DECIMAL
RADAR_ULLAGE 16 - Distance (Ullage)
RADAR_LEVELRATE 17 - Level Rate
RADAR_LEVELRATE_RANGE 18
100
0
0X0425(m/s)
3
The following sub-elements are
available:
• EU_100
•EU_0
• UNITS_INDEX
•DECIMAL
RADAR_LEVEL_SIGNAL_STRENGTH 19 - Signal strength
RADAR_LEVEL_SIGNAL_STRENGTH_RANGE 20
100
0
0x04db(mV)
3
The following sub-elements are
available:
• EU_100
•EU_0
• UNITS_INDEX
•DECIMAL
RADAR_VOLUME 21 Volume
RADAR_VOLUME_RANGE 22
100
0
0x040a(m)
3
The following sub-elements are
available:
• EU_100
•EU_0
• UNITS_INDEX
•DECIMAL
RADAR_INTERNAL_TEMPERATURE 23 - Internal Temperature
RADAR_INTERNAL_TEMPERATURE_
RANGE 24
100
0
0x03e9
3
The following sub-elements are
available:
• EU_100
•EU_0
• UNITS_INDEX
•DECIMAL
ANTENNA_TYPE 25 0x00000000 Antenna Type
ANTENNA_TCL 26 0 TCL (Tank Connection Length)
ANTENNA_PIPE_DIAM 27 0.1 Pipe Inner Diameter
DAMP_VALUE 28 2 Damping value
SIGN_PROC_CONFIG 29 0x00010000 Enable pipe inner diameter
ANTENNA_EXTENSION 30 0x00000000(None) Extended antenna
LCD_PARAMETERS 31 0x00000000(0x000000
00) Parameters to show
LCD_LANGUAGE 32 0x00000000(English) Language on display
LCD_LENGTH_UNIT 33 0x00000000 Length unit on display
LCD_VOLUME_UNIT 34 0x00000000 Volume unit on display
LCD_TEMPERATURE_UNIT 35 0x00000000 Temperature unit on display
LCD_VELOCITY_UNIT 36 0x00000000 Velocity unit on display
GEOM_DIST_OFFSET 37 0 Distance Offset
GEOM_TANK_HEIGHT 38 20 Tank Height (R)
GEOM_MIN_LEVEL_OFFSET 39 0 Minimum distance offset (C)
GEOM_HOLD_OFF 40 0 Hold off distance
GEOM_CAL_DISTANCE 41 0 Calibration Distance
GEOM_TANK_TYPE 42 0x00000000(Unknown) Tank type
GEOM_TANK_BOTTOM_TYPE 43 0x00000000(Unknown) Tank bottom type
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
260
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix E: Level transducer block
November 2014
Level Transducer Block
ENV_ENVIRONMENT 44 0x00000000(0x000000
00) Process Condition
ENV_PRESENTATION 45
0x0c431000(Tank
contains double
bounces | Slow Search |
Show negative level as
zero | Don’t set invalid
level when empty |
Don’t set invalid level
when full | Use jump
filter)
Tank Presentation
ENV_DEVICE_MODE 46 0x00000000(Normal
operation) Service mode
ENV_DIELECTR_CONST 47 0x00000000(Unknown) Dielectric constant
ENV_WRITE_PROTECT 48 0 Write protect
DIAGN_DEV_ALERT 49 Errors, Warnings, Status
DIAGN_VERSION 50 1D0 Gauge SW version
DIAGN_REVISION 51 3 P1451 revision
DIAGN_DEVICE_ID 52 Device ID for the gauge.
DIAGN_DEVICE_MODEL 53 Type of 5400. LF or HF
DIAGN_COMPL_TANK 54 The degree of complexity in the tank
STATS_ATTEMPTS 55
STATS_FAILURES 56
STATS_TIMEOUTS 57
SENSOR_DIAGNOSTICS 58
P1451_SLAVE_STATS 59
P1451_HOST_STATS 60
FF_SUPPORT_INFO 61
HEART_BEAT_COUNT 62
RADAR_LEVEL_TYPE 63 0x0000006e(Level)
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
261
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix E: Level transducer block
November 2014
Level Transducer Block
Table E-3. Antenna Type
Table E-4. Device Mode
Table E-5. Tank Environment
VALUE ANTENNA_TYPE
0User defined
1Cone 2”
2Cone 3”
3Cone 4”
4Cone 6”
5Cone 8”
10 Process Seal 2”
11 Process Seal 3”
12 Process Seal 4”
13 Antenna A0
14 Antenna A1
15 Antenna A2
16 Antenna A3
20 Rod 4” / 100 mm
21 Rod 10” / 250 mm
22 Antenna B3
23 Antenna B4
24 Antenna B5
30 Cone 2” Exotic
31 Cone 3” Exotic
32 Cone 4” Exotic
33 Cone 6” Exotic
34 Cone 8” Exotic
40 Antenna D1
41 Antenna D2
42 Antenna D3
43 Antenna D4
44 Antenna D5
VALUE ENV_DEVICE_MODE
0Normal operation
1Spare
2Restart device
3 Set to factory default database
Bit Number Value of
ENV_ENVIRONMENT DESCRIPTION
0 0x00000001 Reserved
1 0x00000002 Rapid Level Changes (> 40 mm/s, > 1.5 in/s)
2 0x00000004 Reserved
3 0x00000008 Turbulent Surface
4 0x00000010 Foam
5 0x00000020 Solid Product
262
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix E: Level transducer block
November 2014
Level Transducer Block
Table E-6. Presentation
Table E-7. LCD Parameters
Bit Number Value of
ENV_PRESENTATION DESCRIPTION
0 0x00000001 Reserved
1 0x00000002 Level above min distance possible
2 0x00000004 Predicting_Allowed
3 0x00000008 Bottom echo always visible if tank is empty
4 0x00000010 Tank contains double bounces
5 0x00000020 Slow Search
6 0x00000040 Enable double surface
7 0x00000080 Select lower surface
8 0x00000100 Bit 7, Reserved
9 0x00000200 Show negative level as zero
10 0x00000400 Bit 9, Reserved
11 0x00000800 Bottom Projection
12 0x00001000 Bit 11, Reserved
13 0x00002000 Don't set invalid level in antenna zone
14 0x00004000 Don't set invalid level when full
15 0x00008000 Don't set invalid level when full
16 0x00010000 Bit 15, Reserved
17 0x00020000 Bit 16, Reserved
18 0x00040000 Bit 17, Reserved
19 0x00080000 Use jump filter
20 0x00100000 Bit 19, Reserved
21 0x00200000 Use Extra echo detection
22 0x00400000 Always track first echo
23 0x00800000 Bit 22, Reserved
24 0x01000000 Bit 23, Reserved
25 0x02000000 Calculate signal quality metrics
26 0x04000000 Infinite alarm delay
27 0x08000000 Bit 26, Reserved
28 0x10000000 Bit 27, Reserved
29 0x20000000 Bit 28, Reserved
30 0x40000000 Bit 29, Reserved
31 0x80000000 Bit 30, Reserved
Bit Number Value of
ENV_PRESENTATION DESCRIPTION
0 0x00000001 Reserved
1 0x00000002 Level
2 0x00000004 Distance
3 0x00000008 Level Rate
4 0x000000010 Signal Strength
5 0x000000020 Volume
6 0x000000040 Internal Temperature
7 0x000000080 Bit 6, reserved
8 0x000000100 Bit 7, reserved
263
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix E: Level transducer block
November 2014
Level Transducer Block
Table E-8. Tank Type
Table E-9. Tank Bottom Type
Table E-10. Dielectrical Constant
E.3 Supported units
E.3.1 Unit codes
Table E-11. Length
9 0x000000200 Bit 8, reserved
10 0x000000400 Bit 9, reserved
11 0x000000800 Bit 10, reserved
VALUE GEOM_TANK_TYPE
0 Unknown
1 Vertical Cylinder
2 Horisontal Cylinder
3 Spherical
4Cubical
VALUE GEOM_TANK_BOTTOM_TYPE
0 Unknown
1 Flat
2Dome
3Cone
4 Flat Inclined
DEVICE VALUE ENV_DIELECTR_CONST
0 Unknown
1 1.9 - 2.5 (e.g. oil based)
2 2.5 - 4.0 (e.g. oil based)
3 4.0 - 10 (e.g. alcohols, acids)
4 > 10 (e.g. water based)
Value Display Description
0(1)
(1) Default only for parameter LCD_LENGTH_UNIT.
Default Unit for LCD is the same as set in the value
window
1010 m meter
1012 cm centimeter
1013 mm millimeter
1018 ft feet
1019 in inch
Bit Number Value of
ENV_PRESENTATION DESCRIPTION
264
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix E: Level transducer block
November 2014
Level Transducer Block
Table E-12. Level Rate
Table E-13. Temperature
Table E-14. Signal Strength
Table E-15. Volume
E.4 Diagnostics device errors
In addition to the BLOCK_ERR and XD_ERROR parameters, more detailed information on the
measurement status can be obtained via SENSOR_DIAGNOSTICS. Table H-1 on page 282 lists
the potential errors and the possible corrective actions for the given values. The corrective
actions are in order of increasing system level compromises. The first step should always be to
reset the gauge and then if the error persists, try the steps in Table H-1. Start with the first
corrective action and then try the second.
Value Display Description
0(1)
(1) Default only for parameter LCD_VELOCITY_UNIT.
Default Unit for LCD is the same as set in the value
window
1061 M/s Meter per second
1063 M/h Meter per hour
1067 Ft/s Feet per second
1069 In/m Inch per minute
Value Display Description
0(1)
(1) Default only for parameter LCD_TEMPERATURE_UNIT.
Default Unit for LCD is the same as set in the value
window
1001 °C Degree Celsius
1002 °F Degree Fahrenheit
Value Display Description
1243 mV millivolt
Value Display Description
0(1)
(1) Default only for parameter LCD_VOLUME_UNIT.
Default Unit for LCD is the same as set in the value
window
1034 M3Cubic meter
1038 L Liter
1042 In3Cubic Inch
1043 Ft3Cubic feet
1044 Yd3Cubic yard
1048 Gallon US gallon
1049 ImpGall Imperial gallon
1051 Bbl Barrel (oil)
265
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix F: Register transducer block
November 2014
Register Transducer Block
Appendix F Register Transducer Block
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 265
F.1 Overview
The Register Transducer Block allows access to Database registers and Input registers of the
Rosemount 5400 transmitter. This makes it possible to read a selected set of registers directly
by accessing the memory location.
The Register Transducer Block is only available with advanced service.
F.1.1 Register access transducer block parameters
Table F-1. Register Access Transducer Block Parameters
Since this Register Transducer Block allows access to most registers in the transmitter,
which includes the registers set by the Methods and Configuration screens, in the Level
Transducer Block (see Appendix E: Level Transducer Block) it should be handled with care
and ONLY to be changed by trained and certified service personnel, or as guided by
Emerson Process Management, Rosemount Business Unit support personnel.
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
ST_REV 1 The revision level of the static data associated with the
function block. The revision value increments each time a
static parameter value in the block is changed.
TAG_DESC 2 The user description of the intended application of the
block.
STRATEGY 3 0 The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of
blocks. This data is not checked or processed by the block.
ALERT_KEY 4 0 The identification number of the plant unit. This
information may be used in the host for sorting alarms,
etc.
MODE_BLK 5
0x08(Auto)
0x08(Auto)
0x88(Auto | OOS)
0x08(Auto)
The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the
block.
Target: The mode to “go to”
Actual: The mode the “block is currently in”
Permitted: Allowed modes that target may take on
Normal: Most common mode for target
BLOCK_ERR 6
This parameter reflects the error status associated with
the hardware or software components associated with a
block. It is a bit string, so that multiple errors may be
shown.
266
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix F: Register transducer block
November 2014
Register Transducer Block
UPDATE_EVT 7 This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
BLOCK_ALM 8
The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware,
connection failure, or system problems in the block. The
cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first
alert to become active will set the Active status in the
Status parameter. As soon as the Unreported status is
cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert
may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the
subcode has changed.
TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY 9 0 Directory that specifies the number and starting indices
of the transducers in the transducer block.
TRANSDUCER_TYPE 10 0x8080(0x8080) Identifies the transducer.
XD_ERROR 11 A transducer block alarm subcode.
COLLECTION_DIRECTORY 12 0 A directory that specifies the number, starting indices,
and DD Item IDs of the data collections in each transducer
within a transducer block.
TRANSDUCER_TYPE_VER 13 769 Transducer type version = 0x0301
RB_PARAMETER 14 0 Reserved. RB parameter
INP_REG_1_TYPE 15 Register type
INP_REG_1_FLOAT 16 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_1_INT_DEC 17 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_2_TYPE 18 Register type
INP_REG_2_FLOAT 19 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_2_INT_DEC 20 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_3_TYPE 21 Register type
INP_REG_3_FLOAT 22 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_3_INT_DEC 23 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_4_TYPE 24 Register type
INP_REG_4_FLOAT 25 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_4_INT_DEC 26 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_5_TYPE 27 Register type
INP_REG_5_FLOAT 28 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_5_INT_DEC 29 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_6_TYPE 30 Register type
INP_REG_6_FLOAT 31 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_6_INT_DEC 32 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_7_TYPE 33 Register type
INP_REG_7_FLOAT 34 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
267
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix F: Register transducer block
November 2014
Register Transducer Block
INP_REG_7_INT_DEC 35 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_8_TYPE 36 Register type
INP_REG_8_FLOAT 37 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_8_INT_DEC 38 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_9_TYPE 39 Register type
INP_REG_9_FLOAT 40 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_9_INT_DEC 41 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
INP_REG_10_TYPE 42 Register type
INP_REG_10_FLOAT 43 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
INP_REG_10_INT_DEC 44 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_1_TYPE 45 Register type
DB_REG_1_FLOAT 46 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_1_INT_DEC 47 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_2_TYPE 48 Register type
DB_REG_2_FLOAT 49 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_2_INT_DEC 50 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_3_TYPE 51 Register type
DB_REG_3_FLOAT 52 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_3_INT_DEC 53 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_4_TYPE 54 Register type
DB_REG_4_FLOAT 55 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_4_INT_DEC 56 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_5_TYPE 57 Register type
DB_REG_5_FLOAT 58 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_5_INT_DEC 59 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_6_TYPE 60 Register type
DB_REG_6_FLOAT 61 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_6_INT_DEC 62 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_7_TYPE 63 Register type
DB_REG_7_FLOAT 64 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
268
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix F: Register transducer block
November 2014
Register Transducer Block
DB_REG_7_INT_DEC 65 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_8_TYPE 66 Register type
DB_REG_8_FLOAT 67 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_8_INT_DEC 68 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_9_TYPE 69 Register type
DB_REG_9_FLOAT 70 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_9_INT_DEC 71 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
DB_REG_10_TYPE 72 Register type
DB_REG_10_FLOAT 73 If the register contains a float value, it shall be displayed
here
DB_REG_10_INT_DEC 74 If the register contains a DWORD value and dec is chosen,
it shall be displayed here
RM_COMMAND 75 Used to set what will be read or write from a secondary
master.
RM_DATA 76 Data read/write from secondary master.
RM_STATUS 77 Status read by a secondary master.
INP_SEARCH_START_NBR 78 Search start number for input registers.
DB_SEARCH_START_NBR 79 Search start number for holding registers.
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
269
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix G: Advanced configuration transducer block
November 2014
Advanced Configuration Transducer Block
Appendix G Advanced Configuration
Transducer Block
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 269
G.1 Overview
The Advanced Configuration Transducer Block contains functions for advanced configuration of
the Rosemount 5400 Series transmitter. It includes functions such as amplitude threshold
settings for filtering of disturbing echoes and noise, simulation of measurement values, and
strapping table for volume measurements.
G.1.1 Advanced configuration transducer block parameters
Table G-1. Advanced Configuration Transducer Block Parameters
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
ST_REV 1 N/A
The revision level of the static data
associated with the function block. The
revision value increments each time a static
parameter value in the block is changed.
TAG_DESC 2 N/A The user description of the intended
application of the block.
STRATEGY 3 0 The strategy field can be used to identify
grouping of blocks. This data is not checked
or processed by the block.
ALERT_KEY 4 0 The identification number of the plant unit.
This information may be used in the host for
sorting alarms, etc.
MODE_BLK 5
0x88(Auto | OOS)
0x08(Auto)
The actual, target, permitted, and normal
modes of the block.
• Target: The mode to “go to”
• Actual: The mode the “block is currently in”
• Permitted: Allowed modes that target may
take on
• Normal: Most common mode for target
BLOCK_ERR 6 N/A
This parameter reflects the error status
associated with the hardware or software
components associated with a block. It is a
bit string, so that multiple errors may be
shown.
UPDATE_EVT 7 N/A
BLOCK_ALM 8 N/A
TRANSDUCER_DIRECTORY 9 0
TRANSDUCER_TYPE 10 0x8121(0x8121) Identifies the transducer.
270
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix G: Advanced configuration transducer block
November 2014
Advanced Configuration Transducer Block
XD_ERROR 11 N/A A transducer block alarm subcode.
COLLECTION_DIRECTORY 12 0
TRANSDUCER_TYPE_VER 13 769
AMPLITUDE_THRESHOLD_CURVE 14 0x00000000(Undefined)
0
Command. The following sub-elements are
available:
•ACTION
•VALUE
SIMULATION_MODE 15 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
0
Simulation of measurement values. The
following sub-elements are available:
•ACTION
•VALUE
SURFACE_SEARCH 16 0
If the device has locked on a false echo, you
can use this function to force the device to
search for the product surface echo within
the whole tank.
SET_EMPTY_TANK 17 0x00000000(No Action) Command.
SET_CONSTANT_THRESHOLD 18 0 A constant amplitude threshold can be used
to filter out noise.
ECHO_UPDATE 19 0x00000000
(Uninitialized)
ECHO_FOUND_DISTANCE 20 0
ECHO_FOUND_AMPLITUDE 21 0
ECHO_FOUND_CLASS 22 0x00(Unknown)
ECHO_COMMAND 23 0x00000000
(Uninitialized)
The following sub-elements are available:
•ACTION
•VALUE
ECHO_FALSE 24 0
VOL_VOLUME_CALC_METHOD 25 0x000000fb(None)
VOL_IDEAL_DIAMETER 26 20 Tank diameter
VOL_IDEAL_LENGTH 27 20 Tank length
VOL_VOLUME_OFFSET 28 0 Volume offset
VOL_STRAP_TABLE_LENGTH 29 2 Number of strap points
VOL_STRAP_LEV_1 30 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_1 31 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_2 32 10 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_2 33 10 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_3 34 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_3 35 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_4 36 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_4 37 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_5 38 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_5 39 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_6 40 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_6 41 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_7 42 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_7 43 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_8 44 0 Strap value level
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
271
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix G: Advanced configuration transducer block
November 2014
Advanced Configuration Transducer Block
VOL_STRAP_VOL_8 45 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_9 46 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_9 47 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_10 48 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_10 49 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_11 50 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_11 51 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_12 52 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_12 53 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_13 54 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_13 55 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_14 56 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_14 57 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_15 58 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_15 59 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_16 60 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_16 61 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_17 62 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_17 63 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_18 64 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_18 65 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_19 66 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_19 67 0 Strap value volume
VOL_STRAP_LEV_20 68 0 Strap value level
VOL_STRAP_VOL_20 69 0 Strap value volume
LENGTH_UNIT 70 0x000003f2(m)
VOLUME_UNIT 71 0x0000040a(m)
SIGNAL_STRENGTH_UNIT 72 0x000004db(mV)
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
272
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix G: Advanced configuration transducer block
November 2014
Advanced Configuration Transducer Block
273
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
Appendix H Resource Block
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 273
Parameters and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 273
H.1 Overview
This section contains information on the Rosemount 5400 Series Radar Level Transmitter
Resource Block. Descriptions of all Resource Block Parameters, errors, and diagnostics are
included. Also the modes, alarm detection, status handling, and troubleshooting are discussed.
Definition
The resource block defines the physical resources of the device. The resource block also handles
functionality that is common across multiple blocks. The block has no linkable inputs or
outputs.
H.2 Parameters and descriptions
The table below lists all of the configurable parameters of the resource block, including the
descriptions and index numbers for each.
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
ST_REV 01 0 The revision level of the static data associated with the
function block.
TAG_DESC 02 The user description of the intended application of the
block.
STRATEGY 03 0 The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of
blocks.
ALERT_KEY 04 0 The identification number of the plant unit.
MODE_BLK 05
0x08(Auto)
0x08(Auto)
0x88(Auto | OOS)
0x08(Auto)
The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of
the block:
Target: The mode to “go to”
Actual: The mode the “block is currently in”
Permitted: Allowed modes that target may take on
Normal: Most common mode for actual
BLOCK_ERR 06 0x0000(0x0000) This parameter reflects the error status associated with
the hardware or software components associated with
a block. It is a bit string, so that multiple errors may be
shown.
RS_STATE 07 0x04(Online) State of the function block application state machine.
TEST_RW 08 Read/write test parameter - used only for conformance
testing.
DD_RESOURCE 09 String identifying the tag of the resource which
contains the Device Description for this resource.
274
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
MANUFAC_ID 10 0x00001151 Manufacturer identification number – used by an
interface device to locate the DD file for the resource.
DEV_TYPE 11 5400 Manufacturer’s model number associated with the
resource - used by interface devices to locate the DD
file for the resource.
DEV_REV 12 3 Manufacturer revision number associated with the
resource - used by an interface device to locate the DD
file for the resource.
DD_REV 13 1 Revision of the DD associated with the resource - used
by an interface device to locate the DD file for the
resource.
GRANT_DENY 14 0x00(0x00) Options for controlling access of host computers and
local control panels to operating, tuning, and alarm
parameters of the block. Not used by device.
HARD_TYPES 15 0x0001(Scalar Input) The types of hardware available as channel numbers.
RESTART 16 0x01(Run) Allows a manual restart to be initiated. Several degrees
of restart are possible. They are the following:
1 Run – nominal state when not restarting
2 Restart resource – not used
3 Restart with defaults – set parameters to default
values. See START_WITH_DEFAULTS below for which
parameters are set.
4 Restart processor – does a warm start of CPU.
FEATURES 17 0x0c1b(Unicode |
Reports | Soft W Lock |
Hard W Lock | Multi-bit
Alarm (Bit-Alarm)
Support | Restart/Relink
after FB_Action)
Used to show supported resource block options. See
Error! Reference source not found. The supported
features are: SOFT_WRITE_LOCK_SUPPORT,
HARD_WRITE_LOCK_SUPPORT, REPORTS, and
UNICODE
FEATURES_SEL 18 0x0000(0x0000) Used to select resource block options.
CYCLE_TYPE 19 0x0003(Scheduled |
Block Execution)
Identifies the block execution methods available for
this resource.
CYCLE_SEL 20 0x0000(0x0000) Used to select the block execution method for this
resource. The Rosemount 5600 supports the
following:
Scheduled: Blocks are only executed based on the
function block schedule.
Block Execution: A block may be executed by linking to
another blocks completion.
MIN_CYCLE_T 21 8000 Time duration of the shortest cycle interval of which
the resource is capable.
MEMORY_SIZE 22 16 Available configuration memory in the empty
resource. To be checked before
attempting a download.
NV_CYCLE_T 23 960000 Minimum time interval specified by the manufacturer
for writing copies of NV parameters to non-volatile
memory. Zero means it will never be automatically
copied. At the end of NV_CYCLE_T, only those
parameters which have changed need to be updated in
NVRAM.
FREE_SPACE 24 23.8095 Percent of memory available for further configuration.
Zero in a preconfigured device.
FREE_TIME 25 0 Percent of the block processing time that is free to
process additional blocks.
SHED_RCAS 26 640000 Time duration at which to give up on computer writes
to function block RCas locations. Shed from RCas shall
never happen when SHED_ROUT = 0
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
275
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
SHED_ROUT 27 640000 Time duration at which to give up on computer writes
to function block ROut locations. Shed from ROut shall
never happen when SHED_ROUT = 0
FAULT_STATE 28 0x01(Clear) Condition set by loss of communication to an output
block, fault promoted to an output block or physical
contact. When FAIL_SAFE condition is set, then output
function blocks will perform their FAIL_SAFE actions.
SET_FSTATE 29 0x01(OFF) Allows the FAIL_SAFE condition to be manually
initiated by selecting Set.
CLR_FSTATE 30 0x01(Off) Writing a Clear to this parameter will clear the device
FAIL_SAFE if the field condition has cleared.
MAX_NOTIFY 31 3 Maximum number of unconfirmed notify messages
possible.
LIM_NOTIFY 32 3 Maximum number of unconfirmed alert notify
messages allowed.
CONFIRM_TIME 33 640000 The time the resource will wait for confirmation of
receipt of a report before trying again. Retry will not
happen when CONFIRM_TIME=0.
WRITE_LOCK 34 0x01(Not Locked) If set, no writes from anywhere are allowed, except to
clear WRITE_LOCK. Block inputs will continue to be
updated.
UPDATE_EVT 35 This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
BLOCK_ALM 36 The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware,
connection failure, or system problems in the block.
The cause of the alert is entered in the subcode field.
The first alert to become active will set the Active
status in the Status parameter. As soon as the
Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting
task, another block alert may be reported without
clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
ALARM_SUM 37 The current alert status, unacknowledged states,
unreported states, and disabled states of the alarms
associated with the function block.
ACK_OPTION 38 0x0000(0x0000) Selection of whether alarms associated with the
function block will be automatically acknowledged.
WRITE_PRI 39 0 Priority of the alarm generated by clearing the write
lock.
WRITE_ALM 40
0X00(Uninitialized)
0x00(Uninitialized)
01/01/72 00:00:00
0x0000(Other)
0x00(State 0)
This alert is generated if the write lock parameter is
cleared. Five sub-elements available:
- UNACKNOWLEDGED
- ALARM_STATE
- TIME_STAMP
- SUB_CODE
- VALUE
ITK_VER 41 5 Major revision number of the inter operability test case
used in certifying this device as interoperable. The
format and range are controlled by the Fieldbus
Foundation.
distributor 42 0x00001151
(Rosemount)
Reserved for use as distributor ID. No FOUNDATION
enumerations defined at this time.
DEV_STRING 43 0 This is used to load new licensing into the device. The
value can be written but will always read back with a
value of 0.
XD_OPTIONS 44 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Indicates which transducer block licensing options are
enabled.
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
276
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
FB_OPTIONS 45 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Indicates which function block licensing options are
enabled.
DIAG_OPTIONS 46 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Indicates which diagnostics licensing options are
enabled.
MISC_OPTIONS 47 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Indicates which miscellaneous licensing options are
enabled.
RB_SFTWR_REV_MAJOR 48 3 Major revision of software that the resource block was
created with.
RB_SFTWR_REV_MINOR 49 0 Minor revision of software that the resource block was
created with.
RB_SFTWR_REV_BUILD 50 33 Build of software that the resource block was created
with.
RB_SFTWR_REV_ALL 51 3-00-033 - Mon Apr 18
16:47:05 2011 by
chadwar
The string will contain the following fields:
Major rev: 1-3 characters, decimal number 0-255
Minor rev: 1-3 characters, decimal number 0-255
Build rev: 1-5 characters, decimal number 0-255
Time of build: 8 characters, xx:xx:xx, military time
Day of week of build: 3 characters, Sun, Mon,...
Month of build: 3 characters, Jan, Feb.
Day of month of build: 1-2 characters, decimal number
1-31
Year of build: 4 characters, decimal
Builder: 7 characters, login name of builder
hardware_rev 52 6 Hardware revision of the hardware that has the
resource block in it.
output_board_sn 53 Output board serial number.
FINAL_ASSY_NUM 54 0 The same final assembly number placed on the neck
label.
detailed_status 55 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Indicates the state of the transmitter. See Resource
Block detailed status codes.
summary_status 56 0x01(No repair needed) An enumerated value of repair analysis.
message_date 57 01/01/84 00:00:00 Date associated with the MESSAGE_TEXT parameter.
message_text 58 Used to indicate changes made by the user to the
device's installation, configuration,
or calibration.
SELF_TEST 59 0x01(No self test) Instructs resource block to perform self-test. Tests are
device specific.
define_write_lock 60 0x01(Everything locked) Allows the operator to select how WRITE_LOCK
behaves. The initial value is “lock everything”. If the
value is set to “lock only physical device”, then the
resource and transducer blocks of the device will be
locked but changes to function blocks will be allowed.
save_config_now 61 0x01(No save) Allows the user to optionally save all non-volatile
information immediately.
save_config_blocks 62 0 Number of EEPROM blocks that have been modified
since last burn. This value will count down to zero
when the configuration is saved.
start_with_defaults 63 0x01(No NV defaults) 0 = Uninitialized
1 = do not power-up with NV defaults
2 = power-up with default node address
3 = power-up with default pd_tag and node address
4 = power-up with default data for the entire
communications stack (no application data)
simulate_IO 64 0x01(Jumper off) Status of simulate switch.
security_IO 65 0x01(Jumper off) Status of security switch.
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
277
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
SIMULATE_STATE 66 0x01(Jumper off* no
simulation)
The state of the simulate switch:
0 = Uninitialized
1 = Switch off, simulation not allowed
2 = Switch on, simulation not allowed (need to cycle
jumper/switch)
3 = Switch on, simulation allowed
download_mode 67 0x01(Run Mode) Gives access to the boot block code for over-the-wire
downloads.
0 = Uninitialized
1 = Run mode
2 = Download mode
RECOMMENDED_ACTION 68 0x0001
(No action required.)
Enumerated list of recommended actions displayed
with a device alert.
FAILED_PRI 69 0 Designates the alarming priority of the FAILED_ALM.
FAILED_ENABLE 70 0x00007760
(Software Error | Sensor
Database Error | Internal
Temperature Critical |
Electronics Failure - Main
Board | Software
Incompatibility Error |
Memory Failure - Output
Board | Internal
Communication Failure
| Electronics Failure -
Output Board)
Enabled FAILED_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds
bit for bit to the FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit on means that
the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will
be detected. A bit off means the corresponding alarm
condition is disabled and will not be detected.
FAILED_MASK 71 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Mask of FAILED_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to
FAILED_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the condition is
masked out from alarming.
FAILED_ACTIVE 72 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Enumerated list of failure conditions within a device.
FAILED_ALM 73 Alarm indicating a failure within a device which makes
the device non-operational.
MAINT_PRI 74 0 Designates the alarming priority of the MAINT_ALM
MAINT_ENABLE 75 0x08608000
(Device Simulation
Active | Configuration
Warning | Internal
Temperature Out of
Limits | Configuration
Error
Enabled MAINT_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds
bit for bit to the MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit on means that
the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will
be detected. A bit off means the corresponding alarm
condition is disabled and will not be detected.
MAINT_MASK 76 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Mask of MAINT_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to
MAINT_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the condition is
masked out from alarming.
MAINT_ACTIVE 77 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Enumerated list of maintenance conditions within a
device.
MAINT_ALM 78 Alarm indicating the device needs maintenance soon.
If the condition is ignored, the device will eventually
fail.
ADVISE_PRI 79 0 Designates the alarming priority of the ADVISE_ALM
ADVISE_ENABLE 80 0x10000000
(PlantWeb® Alerts
Simulation Active)
Enabled ADVISE_ALM alarm conditions. Corresponds
bit for bit to the ADVISE_ACTIVE. A bit on means that
the corresponding alarm condition is enabled and will
be detected. A bit off means the corresponding alarm
condition is disabled and will not be detected.
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
278
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
H.2.1 PlantWeb® alerts
The Resource Block will act as a coordinator for PlantWeb alerts. There will be three alarm
parameters (FAILED_ALARM, MAINT_ALARM, and ADVISE_ALARM) which will contain
information regarding some of the device errors which are detected by the transmitter
software. There will be a RECOMMENDED_ACTION parameter which will be used to display the
recommended action text for the highest priority alarm and a HEALTH_INDEX parameters (0 -
100) indicating the overall health of the transmitter. FAILED_ALARM will have the highest
priority followed by MAINT_ALARM and ADVISE_ALARM will be the lowest priority.
FAILED_ALARMS
A failure alarm indicates a failure within a device that will make the device or some part of the
device non-operational. This implies that the device is in need of repair and must be fixed
immediately. There are five parameters associated with FAILED_ALARMS specifically, they are
described below.
FAILED_ENABLED
This parameter contains a list of failures in the device which makes the device non-operational
that will cause an alert to be sent. Below is a list of the failures:
Electronics Failure - Output Board
Internal Communication Failure
Memory Failure - Output Board
Software Incompatibility Error
Electronics Failure - Main Board
Internal Temperature Critical
Sensor Database Error
Software Error
FAILED_MASK
This parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed in FAILED_ENABLED. A bit on means
that the condition is masked out from alarming and will not be reported.
ADVISE_MASK 81 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Mask of ADVISE_ALM. Corresponds bit of bit to
ADVISE_ACTIVE. A bit on means that the condition is
masked out from alarming.
ADVISE_ACTIVE 82 0x00000000
(0x00000000)
Enumerated list of advisory conditions within a device.
ADVISE_ALM 83 Alarm indicating advisory alarms. These conditions do
not have a direct impact on the process or device
integrity.
HEALTH_INDEX 84 100 Parameter representing the overall health of the
device, 100 being perfect and 10 being
non-functioning. The value is based on the active PWA
alarms.
PWA_SIMULATE 85 0x00(Simulation off) Parameter allowing simulation of PWA alarms.
Parameter Index
number Default value Description
279
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
FAILED_PRI
Designates the alerting priority of the FAILED_ALM, see “Alarm priority” on page 281. The
default is 0 and the recommended values are between 8 and 15.
FAILED_ACTIVE
This parameter displays which of the alarms is active. Only the alarm with the highest priority
will be displayed. This priority is not the same as the FAILED_PRI parameter described above.
This priority is hard coded within the device and is not user configurable.
FAILED_ALM
Alarm indicating a failure within a device which makes the device non-operational.
MAINT_ALARMS
A maintenance alarm indicates the device or some part of the device needs maintenance soon.
If the condition is ignored, the device will eventually fail. There are five parameters associated
with MAINT_ALARMS, they are described below.
MAINT_ENABLED
The MAINT_ENABLED parameter contains a list of conditions indicating the device or some part
of the device needs maintenance soon.
Below is a list of the conditions:
Configuration Error
Level Measurement Failure
Volume Measurement Failure
Internal Temperature Out of Limits
Configuration Warning
Volume Measurement Warning
Device Simulation Active
MAINT_MASK
The MAINT_MASK parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed in MAINT_ENABLED. A
bit on means that the condition is masked out from alarming and will not be reported.
MAINT_PRI
MAINT_PRI designates the alarming priority of the MAINT_ALM, see “Recommended actions for
PlantWeb alerts” on page 282. The default is 0 and the recommended values is 3 to 7.
MAINT_ACTIVE
The MAINT_ACTIVE parameter displays which of the alarms is active. Only the condition with
the highest priority will be displayed. This priority is not the same as the MAINT_PRI parameter
described above. This priority is hard coded within the device and is not user configurable.
280
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
MAINT_ALM
An alarm indicating the device needs maintenance soon. If the condition is ignored, the device
will eventually fail.
Advisory alarms
An advisory alarm indicates informative conditions that do not have a direct impact on the
device's primary functions. There are five parameters associated with ADVISE_ALARMS, they are
described below.
ADVISE_ENABLED
The ADVISE_ENABLED parameter contains a list of informative conditions that do not have a
direct impact on the device's primary functions. The following advisory alarm may be displayed:
PlantWeb Alerts Simulation Active
ADVISE_MASK
The ADVISE_MASK parameter will mask any of the failed conditions listed in ADVISE_ENABLED.
A bit on means the condition is masked out from alarming and will not be reported.
ADVISE_PRI
ADVISE_PRI designates the alarming priority of the ADVISE_ALM, see “Recommended actions
for PlantWeb alerts” on page 282. The default is 0 and the recommended values are 1 or 2.
ADVISE_ACTIVE
The ADVISE_ACTIVE parameter displays which of the advisories is active. Only the advisory with
the highest priority will be displayed. This priority is not the same as the ADVISE_PRI parameter
described above. This priority is hard coded within the device and is not user configurable.
ADVISE_ALM
ADVISE_ALM is an alarm indicating advisory alarms. These conditions do not have a direct
impact on the process or device integrity.
281
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
H.2.2 Alarm priority
Alarms are grouped into five levels of priority:
Priority
number Priority description
0 The alarm condition is not used.
1An alarm condition with a priority of 1 is recognized by the
system, but is not reported to the operator.
2An alarm condition with a priority of 2 is reported to the
operator.
3-7 Alarm conditions of priority 3 to 7 are advisory alarms of
increasing priority.
8-15 Alarm conditions of priority 8 to 15 are critical alarms of
increasing priority.
282
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
H.2.3 Recommended actions for PlantWeb alerts
RECOMMENDED_ACTION
The RECOMMENDED_ACTION parameter displays a text string that will give a recommended
course of action to take based on which type and which specific event of the PlantWeb alerts are
active.
Table H-1. Recommended Actions
Alarm type Failed/maint/advise/
active event Description Recommended action
Advisory PlantWeb alerts
simulation active
Alerts are currently being simulated.
Real alerts active in the device are
blocked (except for this alert).
Use the switch on the fieldbus
electronics board to turn simulation on
or off.
Maintenance
Device simulation
active
The measurement output from the
device is currently being simulated.
Simulation disables normal
measurement except for Internal
Temperature. Variables are GOOD if the
simulated level is GOOD and the device is
in service.
Use "Start/Stop Device Simulation" to
enable or disable simulation.
Volume measurement
warning The level measurement is outside the
configured volume range. Check volume configuration.
Configuration warning
The configuration of at least one
parameter is outside specifications. Refer
to the device manual for details.
Disregard this alert if the device is
working properly.
Check device configuration.
Internal temperature
out of limits Internal temperature is outside its limits
(-40 °F/-40 °C to 176 °F/+80 °C). Check ambient temperature at
installation site.
Volume measurement
failure
Reasons may be multiple:
• Incorrect volume configuration
• Level measurement invalid
Volume status is set to BAD.
2. If Level Measurement Failure is
active, clear that alert first.
3. Check volume configuration.
4. Load default database to the device
and reconfigure it.
5. If the error persists, it might indicate
a hardware error. Replace the
transmitter head.
Level measurement
failure
No valid level reading. Reasons may be
multiple:
• No valid surface echo peak in the
measuring range.
• Incorrect transmitter configuration
Level status is set to BAD.
1. Analyze echo curve for reason and
check device configuration.
2. Check device physical installation
(for instance, antenna
contamination).
3. Load default database to the device
and reconfigure it.
4. If the error persists, it might indicate
a hardware error. Replace the
transmitter head.
Configuration error
At least one of the configuration
parameters is outside its allowed
minimum-maximum range.
The default value for applicable
parameters is being used.
Load default database to the device
and reconfigure it.
283
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
Failed
Software error
The device software has encountered an
error. Reasons may be multiple, including
too low supplied voltage, or an error
being simulated.
The status for all variables is BAD, and the
device is out of service.
1. Make sure that enough voltage is
supplied to the device.
2. Restart the device.
3. Turn off simulation of device failure.
4. If the alert persists, replace the
transmitter head.
Sensor database error
The device has found an error in the
configuration database.
Status for all variables is BAD. Device
recovery is possible.
1. Load default database to the device
to clear the error.
2. Reconfigure the device.
3. If the alert persists, replace the
transmitter head.
Internal temperature
critical
The internal temperature of the device
has reached critical levels and the
integrity of the device electronics has
been compromised. Ambient
temperature should not exceed device
specifications
(-40 °F/-40 °C to 176 °F/+80 °C).
The device is not in service (OOS) and
status for all variables is BAD.
Replace the transmitter head.
Electronics failure –
main board
The device has detected a fault with an
electrical component on the main board
electronics module assembly.
The status for all variables is BAD, and the
device is out of service.
Replace the transmitter head.
Software
incompatibility error
Fieldbus software and main firmware
versions are incompatible.
The device is not in service (OOS). Replace the transmitter head.
Memory failure -
output board
Configuration data has been corrupted or
pending configuration changes has been
lost due to loss of power before storage
could complete.
Default values are loaded into the faulty
block. Potential errors in stored data may
cause unwanted behavior. The device is
not in service (OOS) and status for all
variables is BAD. Device recovery is
possible.
1. Load default database to the device
to clear the error.
2. Download a device configuration.
3. If the error persists, it may indicate a
faulty memory chip. Replace the
transmitter head.
Internal
communication failure
The communication between the main
transmitter board and the fieldbus
electronics board has been lost.
The device holds the last known
measurement values with status BAD.
Replace the transmitter head.
Electronics failure -
output board
The device has detected a fault with an
electrical component on the output
board electronics module assembly.
The device is not in service (OOS).
Replace the transmitter head.
Alarm type Failed/maint/advise/
active event Description Recommended action
284
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix H: Resource block
November 2014
Resource Block
285
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
Appendix I Analog-Input Block
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 288
Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 289
Signal conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 289
Block errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 290
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 290
Alarm detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 291
Configure the AI block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 293
Figure I-1. Analog-Input Block
The Analog-Input (AI) function block processes field device measurements and makes them
available to other function blocks. The output value from the AI block is in engineering units and
contains a status indicating the quality of the measurement. The measuring device may have
several measurements or derived values available in different channels. Use the channel number
to define the variable that the AI block processes.
The AI block supports alarming, signal scaling, signal filtering, signal status calculation, mode
control, and simulation. In Automatic mode, the block’s output parameter (OUT) reflects the
process variable (PV) value and status. In Manual mode, OUT may be set manually. The Manual
mode is reflected on the output status. A discrete output (OUT_D) is provided to indicate
whether a selected alarm condition is active. Alarm detection is based on the OUT value and
user specified alarm limits. Figure 2 on page 288 illustrates the internal components of the AI
function block, and Table 1 lists the AI block parameters and their units of measure,
descriptions, and index numbers.
Table I-1. Definitions of Analog-Input Function Block System Parameters
Parameter Index
number Units Description
ST_REV 01 None The revision level of the static data associated with the function block.
The revision value will be incremented each time a static parameter
value in the block is changed.
TAG_DESC 02 None The user description of the intended application of the block.
STRATEGY 03 None The strategy field can be used to identify grouping of blocks. This data is
not checked or processed by the block.
OUT=The block output value and status
OUT_D=Discrete output that signals a selected
alarm condition
OUT_D
AI OUT
286
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
ALERT_KEY 04 None The identification number of the plant unit. This information may be
used in the host for sorting alarms, etc.
MODE_BLK 05 None
The actual, target, permitted, and normal modes of the block.
Target: The mode to “go to”
Actual: The mode the “block is currently in”
Permitted: Allowed modes that target may take on
Normal: Most common mode for target
BLOCK_ERR 06 None This parameter reflects the error status associated with the hardware or
software components associated with a block. It is a bit string, so that
multiple errors may be shown.
PV 07 EU of XD_SCALE The process variable used in block execution.
OUT 08 EU of OUT_SCALE The block output value and status.
SIMULATE 09 None A group of data that contains the current transducer value and status,
the simulated transducer value and status, and the enable/disable bit.
XD_SCALE 10 None The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of
digits to the right of the decimal point associated with the channel input
value.
OUT_SCALE 11 None The high and low scale values, engineering units code, and number of
digits to the right of the decimal point associated with OUT.
GRANT_DENY 12 None Options for controlling access of host computers and local control
panels to operating, tuning, and alarm parameters of the block. Not
used by device.
IO_OPTS 13 None Allows the selection of input/output options used to alter the PV. Low
cutoff enabled is the only selectable option.
CHANNEL 15 None The CHANNEL value is used to select the measurement value.
You must configure the CHANNEL parameter before you can configure
the XD_SCALE parameter.
L_TYPE 16 None Linearization type. Determines whether the field value is used directly
(Direct) or is converted linearly (Indirect).
LOW_CUT 17 % If percentage value of transducer input fails below this, PV = 0.
PV_FTIME 18 Seconds The time constant of the first-order PV filter. It is the time required for a
63 % change in the IN value.
FIELD_VAL 19 Percent The value and status from the transducer block or from the simulated
input when simulation is enabled.
UPDATE_EVT 20 None This alert is generated by any change to the static data.
BLOCK_ALM 21 None
The block alarm is used for all configuration, hardware, connection
failure or system problems in the block. The cause of the alert is entered
in the subcode field. The first alert to become active will set the Active
status in the Status parameter. As soon as the Unreported status is
cleared by the alert reporting task, another block alert may be reported
without clearing the Active status, if the subcode has changed.
ALARM_SUM 22 None
The summary alarm is used for all process alarms in the block. The cause
of the alert is entered in the subcode field. The first alert to become
active will set the Active status in the Status parameter. As soon as the
Unreported status is cleared by the alert reporting task, another block
alert may be reported without clearing the Active status, if the subcode
has changed.
ACK_OPTION 23 None Used to set auto acknowledgment of alarms.
ALARM_HYS 24 Percent The amount the alarm value must return within the alarm limit before
the associated active alarm condition clears.
HI_HI_PRI 25 None The priority of the HI HI alarm.
HI_HI_LIM 26 EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI HI alarm condition.
HI_PRI 27 None The priority of the HI alarm.
HI_LIM 28 EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the HI alarm condition.
Parameter Index
number Units Description
287
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
LO_PRI 29 None The priority of the LO alarm.
LO_LIM 30 EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the LO alarm condition.
LO_LO_PRI 31 None The priority of the LO LO alarm.
LO_LO_LIM 32 EU of PV_SCALE The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the LO LO alarm condition.
HI_HI_ALM 33 None The HI HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp
of occurrence and the state of the alarm.
HI_ALM 34 None The HI alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of
occurrence and the state of the alarm.
LO_ALM 35 None The LO alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp of
occurrence and the state of the alarm.
LO_LO_ALM 36 None The LO LO alarm data, which includes a value of the alarm, a timestamp
of occurrence and the state of the alarm.
OUT_D 37 None Discrete output to indicate a selected alarm condition.
ALM_SEL 38 None Used to select the process alarm conditions that will cause the OUT_D
parameter to be set.
VAR_INDEX 39 % of OUT Range The average absolute error between the PV and its previous mean value
over that evaluation time defined by VAR_SCAN.
VAR_SCAN 40 Seconds The time over which the VAR_INDEX is evaluated.
Parameter Index
number Units Description
288
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
I.1 Simulation
To support testing, you can either change the mode of the block to manual and adjust the
output value, or you can enable simulation through the configuration tool and manually enter a
value for the measurement value and its status.
With simulation enabled, the actual measurement value has no impact on the OUT value or the
status.
Figure I-2. Analog-Input Function Block Schematic
Figure I-3. Analog-Input Function Block Timing diagram
Analog
measurement
Access
analog
meas.
CHANNEL
SIMULATE
OUT_SCALE
XD_SCALE
FIELD_VAL
L_TYPE
IO_OPTS
PV_FTIME MODE
STATUS_OPTS
HI_HI_LIM
HI_LIM
LO_LO_LIM
LO_LIM
ALARM_HYS
ALARM_TYPE
OUT_D
OUT
PV
Convert Cutoff Filter Status
Calc.
Alarm
detection
NOTES:
OUT = block output value and status.
OUT_D = discrete output that signals a selected alarm condition.
LOW_CUT
PV_FTIME
63 % of Change
OUT (mode in man)
OUT (mode in auto)
PV
Time (seconds)
FIELD_VAL
289
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
I.2 Damping
The filtering feature changes the response time of the device to smooth variations in output
readings caused by rapid changes in input. You can adjust the filter time constant (in seconds)
using the PV_FTIME parameter. Set the filter time constant to zero to disable the filter feature.
I.3 Signal conversion
You can set the signal conversion type with the Linearization Type (L_TYPE) parameter. You can
view the converted signal (in percent of XD_SCALE) through the FIELD_VAL parameter.
You can choose from direct or indirect signal conversion with the L_TYPE parameter.
Direct
Direct signal conversion allows the signal to pass through the accessed channel input value (or the
simulated value when simulation is enabled).
Indirect
Indirect signal conversion converts the signal linearly to the accessed channel input value (or the
simulated value when simulation is enabled) from its specified range (XD_SCALE) to the range
and units of the PV and OUT parameters (OUT_SCALE).
Indirect square root
Indirect square root signal conversion takes the square root of the value computed with the
indirect signal conversion and scales it to the range and units of the PV and OUT parameters.
When the converted input value is below the limit specified by the LOW_CUT parameter, and
the Low Cutoff I/O option (IO_OPTS) is enabled (True), a value of zero is used for the converted
value (PV).
Note
Low Cutoff is the only I/O option supported by the AI block. You can set the I/O option in
Manual or Out of Service mode only.
FIELD_VAL 100 Channel Value EU*@0%–u
EU*@100% EU*@0%–
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------= * XD_SCALE values
PV Channel Value=
PV FIELD_VAL
100
-------------------------------
©¹
§·
EU**@100% EU**@0%–EU**@0%+u=
** OUT_SCALE values
PV FIELD_VAL
100
-------------------------------
©¹
§·
EU**@100% EU**@0%–EU**@0%+u=
** OUT_SCALE values
290
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
I.4 Block errors
Table 2 lists conditions reported in the BLOCK_ERR parameter.
Table I-2. BLOCK_ERR Conditions
I.5 Modes
The AI Function Block supports three modes of operation as defined by the MODE_BLK
parameter:
Manual (Man) The block output (OUT) may be set manually
Automatic (Auto) OUT reflects the analog input measurement or the simulated value
when simulation is enabled.
Out of Service (O/S) The block is not processed. FIELD_VAL and PV are not updated and
the OUT status is set to Bad: Out of Service. The BLOCK_ERR parameter shows Out of
Service. In this mode, you can make changes to all configurable parameters. The target
mode of a block may be restricted to one or more of the supported modes.
Condition
number Condition name and description
0Other
1Block configuration error: the selected channel carries a measurement that is
incompatible with the engineering units selected in XD_SCALE, the L_TYPE parameter is
not configured, or CHANNEL = zero.
2 Link configuration error
3Simulate active: Simulation is enabled and the block is using a simulated value in its
execution.
4Local override
5 Device fault state set
6 Device needs maintenance soon
7Input failure/process variable has bad status: The hardware is bad, or a bad status is
being simulated.
8Output failure: The output is bad based primarily upon a bad input.
9 Memory failure
10 Lost static data
11 Lost NV data
12 Readback check failed
13 Device needs maintenance now
14 Power up
15 Out of service: The actual mode is out of service.
291
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
I.6 Alarm detection
A block alarm will be generated whenever the BLOCK_ERR has an error bit set. The types of
block error for the AI block are defined above.
Process Alarm detection is based on the OUT value. You can configure the alarm limits of the
following standard alarms:
High (HI_LIM)
High high (HI_HI_LIM)
Low (LO_LIM)
Low low (LO_LO_LIM)
In order to avoid alarm chattering when the variable is oscillating around the alarm limit, an
alarm hysteresis in percent of the PV span can be set using the ALARM_HYS parameter. The
priority of each alarm is set in the following parameters:
HI_PRI
HI_HI_PRI
LO_PRI
LO_LO_PRI
Alarms are grouped into five levels of priority:
Table I-3. Alarm Level Priority
Priority
number Priority description
0The priority of an alarm condition changes to 0 after the condition that caused the
alarm is corrected.
1An alarm condition with a priority of 1 is recognized by the system, but is not
reported to the operator.
2An alarm condition with a priority of 2 is reported to the operator, but does not
require operator attention (such as diagnostics and system alerts).
3-7 Alarm conditions of priority 3 to 7 are advisory alarms of increasing priority.
8-15 Alarm conditions of priority 8 to 15 are critical alarms of increasing priority.
292
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
I.6.1 Status handling
Normally, the status of the PV reflects the status of the measurement value, the operating
condition of the I/O card, and any active alarm condition. In Auto mode, OUT reflects the value
and status quality of the PV. In Man mode, the OUT status constant limit is set to indicate that
the value is a constant and the OUT status is Good.
The Uncertain - EU range violation status is always set, and the PV status is set high- or
low-limited if the sensor limits for conversion are exceeded.
In the STATUS_OPTS parameter, you can select from the following options to control the status
handling:
BAD if limited – sets the OUT status quality to Bad when the value is higher or lower than the
sensor limits.
Uncertain if limited – sets the OUT status quality to Uncertain when the value is higher or lower
than the sensor limits.
Uncertain if in manual mode – The status of the Output is set to Uncertain when the mode is
set to Manual.
Note
The instrument must be in Manual or Out of service mode to set the status option.
The AI block only supports the BAD if limited option. Unsupported options are not grayed out;
they appear on the screen in the same manner as supported options.
293
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
I.7 Configure the AI block
A minimum of four parameters are required to configure the AI Block. The parameters are
described below with example configurations shown at the end of this section.
CHANNEL
Select the channel that corresponds to the desired sensor measurement. The Rosemount 5400
measures Level (channel 1), Distance (channel 2), Level Rate (channel 3), Signal Strength
(channel 4), Volume (channel 5), and Internal Temperature (channel 6).
L_TYPE
The L_TYPE parameter defines the relationship of the transmitter measurement (Level,
Distance, Level Rate, Signal Strength, Volume, and Internal Temperature) to the desired output
of the AI Block. The relationship can be direct or indirect root.
Direct
Select direct when the desired output will be the same as the transmitter measurement (Level,
Distance, Level Rate, Signal Strength, Volume, and Internal Temperature).
Indirect
Select indirect when the desired output is a calculated measurement based on the transmitter
measurement (Level, Distance, Level Rate, Signal Strength, Volume, and Internal Temperature).
The relationship between the transmitter measurement and the calculated measurement will
be linear.
Indirect square root
Select indirect square root when the desired output is an inferred measurement based on the
transmitter measurement and the relationship between the sensor measurement and the
inferred measurement is square root (for example, level).
AI block TB channel value Process variable
Level 1 RADAR_LEVEL
Distance 2 RADAR_ULLAGE
Level Rate 3 RADAR_LEVELRATE
Signal Strength 4 RADAR_LEVEL_SIGNAL_STRENGTH
Volume 5 RADAR_VOLUME
Internal Temperature 6 RADAR_INTERNAL_TEMPERATURE
294
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE
The XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE each include three parameters: 0 %,
100 %, and, engineering units. Set these based on the L_TYPE:
L_TYPE is direct
When the desired output is the measured variable, set the XD_SCALE to represent the operating
range of the process. Set OUT_SCALE to match XD_SCALE.
L_TYPE is indirect
When an inferred measurement is made based on the sensor measurement, set the XD_SCALE
to represent the operating range that the sensor will see in the process. Determine the inferred
measurement values that correspond to the XD_SCALE 0 and 100 % points and set these for the
OUT_SCALE.
L_TYPE is indirect square root
When an inferred measurement is made based on the transmitter measurement and the
relationship between the inferred measurement and sensor measurement is square root, set the
XD_SCALE to represent the operating range that the sensor will see in the process. Determine
the inferred measurement values that correspond to the XD_SCALE 0 and 100 % points and set
these for the OUT_SCALE.
Engineering units
Note
To avoid configuration errors, only select Engineering Units for XD_SCALE and OUT_SCALE that
are supported by the device. The supported units are:
Table I-4. Length
Table I-5. Level Rate
Display Description
m meter
cm centimeter
mm millimeter
ft feet
in inch
Display Description
m/s meter per second
m/h meter per hour
ft/s feet per second
in/m inch per minute
295
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
Table I-6. Temperature
Table I-7. Signal Strength
Table I-8. Volume
Display Description
°C Degree Celsius
°F Degree Fahrenheit
Display Description
mV millivolt
Display Description
m3Cubic meter
LLiter
in3Cubic inch
ft3Cubic feet
Yd3Cubic yard
Gallon US gallon
ImpGall Imperial gallon
bbl barrel
296
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Appendix I: Analog-Input block
November 2014
Analog-Input Block
Index-1
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Index
November 2014
Index
A
Address
Temporary Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Advanced Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Advanced ConfigurationTransducer Block. . . . . . . . . . 113
AI Block
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Parameters
BLOCK_ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
IO_OPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
L_TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
LOW_CUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
OUT_SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
PV_FTIME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
XD_SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Air purging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Alarms
Priorety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Always Track First Echo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
AMS Suit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Analog Input (AI) Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 285
BLOCK_ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Analog Input (AI) Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Analog Output
alarm values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
saturation values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Analog Output Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Analog Output Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Antenna
alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Application Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Approval Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ATC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
B
Ball-valve Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Basic Configuration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Beam angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Beamwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 34
Block Configuration
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Block Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 290
BLOCK_ERR
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 290
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Bracket Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Burst mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Burst option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
C
Cable Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Cable/conduit entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Calculation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Calibration Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Canadian Standards Association
approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
system control drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 293
Channel Definitions
Level Transducer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Close Distance Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
COM Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Cone Antenna Flange Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Configuration
Analog Input (AI) Function Block
OUT_SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
XD_SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
L_TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293, 294
Configuration Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Configuration Using DeltaV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
D
Damping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
DeltaV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Density and Vapor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Device Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Device Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Diagnostic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Dielectric Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Product Dielectric Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Dielectric constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293, 294
Direct Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Display
presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Display Panel Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Distance calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Distance Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Index
Index-2
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Index
November 2014
Index
Disturbing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Double Bounce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Double Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Draft Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
E
Echo Curve Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Echo Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Echo Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electrical installation
connecting the transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Intrinsically Safe Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 58
Non-Intrinsically Safe Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tri-Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70
Empty Tank Detection Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Empty Tank Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Extended Cone Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
External circuit breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
External HART Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
F
Factory Mutual
approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
system control drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
False Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
False Echo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
False Echo Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
False echoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Field Communicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10, 101
Filtering
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Full Tank Detection Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Full Tank Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Function blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
G
Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
H
HART Multidrop Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
HART to Modbus Converter (HMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Hazardous Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Hazardous Locations Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Hold Off Distance . . . . . . . . . . .133, 238, 239, 241, 247
Hold Off distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
I
Inclination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 294
Indirect Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Installation
cable selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
cable/conduit entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Service Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
IO_OPTS
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
L
L_TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293, 294
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 120
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
LCD Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
LCD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
LCD variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
LED Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Level calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Level Transducer Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Channel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Level Transducer Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Logging Measurement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Loop-powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LOW_CUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Lower Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
M
Manual
Models covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Maximum load resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Measure and Learn function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Measurement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Measuring Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 199
minifast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Minimum Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Mounting
Bracket Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42
Process Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Standard Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Mounting requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Multidrop connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Multidrop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
N
NAMUR-Compliant Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Node Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Nozzle recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Index-3
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Index
November 2014
Index
O
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Optional Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
OSHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
OUT_SCALE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
L_TYPE
Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
P
Parameter
BLOCK_ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 165
CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
L_TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 294
OUT_SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
XD_SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Performing Proof Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Poll address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Process Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Process Seal Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Product Certifcates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Product Dielectric Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Product Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Product surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PV_FTIME
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
R
Reference pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Register Transducer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 164, 273
Block Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Detailed Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
BLOCK_ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
PlantWeb Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Recommended Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
PlantWeb™ Alerts
advisory alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
failed_alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
maint_alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Summary Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Resource block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Rod Antenna Flanged Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Rod Antenna Threaded Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rosemount 751 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
RRM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
COM Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 100
RS-485 Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
S
Saturation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Select Lower Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Service space recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Service Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Signal Conversion
Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Slow Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Slow Search Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Smart Wireless THUM Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Solid product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Solids applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13, 24, 199
Standard Tank Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Status
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Still-pipes in Metallic Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Strapping Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 110
Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Supported Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Surface Echo Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Surface Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
T
Tag
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Tank Bottom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Tank Bottom Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tank Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 237
Tank height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Tank Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tank Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Tightening torque for Process Seal flanges . . . . . . . . . . 38
Transducer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Transition Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75, 199
Transmitter head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tri-Clamp Tank Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tri-Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 117
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 163
Analog Input (AI) Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Resource Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Troubleshooting chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
U
Upper Null Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 133
Upper Product Dielectric Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Upper Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 76
V
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Vessel Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Volume Calculation Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Index-4
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
Index
November 2014
Index
Volume Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Strapping Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Volume Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Volume Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
W
Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
X
XD_SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
AI Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
L_TYPE
Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4026, Rev HA
2014
Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found at www.rosemount.com/terms_of_sale.
The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.
AMS, PlantWeb, Rosemount, and the Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
DeltaV, THUM, Tri-Clamp, and Tri-Loop are trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
HART and WirelessHART are registered trademarks of the HART Communication Foundation.
Modbus is a registered trademark of Modicon, Inc.
Viton and Kalrez are registered trademarks of DuPont Performance Elastomers.
eurofast and minifast are registered trademarks of TURCK.
FOUNDATION fieldbus is a trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
FDT is a registered trademark of the FDT group.
DTM is a trademark of the FDT group.
PACTware is a trademark of PACTware Consortium.
NACE is a registered trademark of NACE International.
E+H FieldCare is a trademark of Endress + Hauser AG.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2014 Rosemount, Inc. All rights reserved.
Emerson Process Management
Blegistrasse 23
P.O. Box 1046
CH 6341 Baar
Switzerland
Tel +41 (0) 41 768 6111
Fax +41 (0) 41 768 6300
Emerson Process Management
Latin America
1300 Concord Terrace, Suite 400
Sunrise, Florida 33323 USA
Tel +1 954 846 5030
Emerson FZE
P.O. Box 17033
Jebel Ali Free Zone
Dubai UAE
Tel +971 4 811 8100
Fax +971 4 886 5465
Emerson Process Management
Rosemount Measurement
8200 Market Boulevard
Chanhassen, MN 55317 USA
Tel (USA) 1 800 999 9307
Tel (International) +1 952 906 8888
Fax +1 952 906 8889
Emerson Beijing Instrument Co
No.6 North Street, Hepingli
Dongcheng District, Beijing
100013
China
Tel +8610 64282233
Fax +8610 642 87640
Emerson Process Management
Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
Tel +65 6777 8211
Fax +65 6777 0947
Service Support Hotline: +65 6770 8711
Email: Enquiries@AP.EmersonProcess.com